<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<itemContainer xmlns="http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5 http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5/omeka-xml-5-0.xsd" uri="https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/items/browse?search=&amp;advanced%5B0%5D%5Belement_id%5D=49&amp;advanced%5B0%5D%5Btype%5D=contains&amp;advanced%5B0%5D%5Bterms%5D=Exhibition+program&amp;submit_search=Search&amp;output=omeka-xml" accessDate="2026-05-19T16:45:40+00:00">
  <miscellaneousContainer>
    <pagination>
      <pageNumber>1</pageNumber>
      <perPage>15</perPage>
      <totalResults>6</totalResults>
    </pagination>
  </miscellaneousContainer>
  <item itemId="51519" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="47091">
        <src>https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/files/original/b1e4525250ab0ce13153d517adead8d3.pdf</src>
        <authentication>e8e3ea6832da561c69f79e020726b5db</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="404705">
                    <text>�AN EXHIBITION
OF PAINTINGS

BY

THE EIGHT
robert hcnri

arthur b. davies

william glackens
ernest lavvson

georgeluks

maurice prendergast

E.S. FARLEY LIBRARY
WILKES UNIVERSITY
WILKES-BARRE, PA

everelt shinn
john sloan

MARCH 9 — APRIL 1, 1979
WILKES COLLEGE SORDONI ART GALLERY

1

�ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Mr. J. Philip Richards, Director of the Sordoni Gallery,
who lent invaluable aid in the selection process;

The Advisory Commission of the Wilkes College Sordoni
Art Gallery makes grateful acknowledgment to the follow­
ing lenders and to those who through their interest, generos­
ity, and cooperation have so greatly enhanced the success of
this exhibition:

Mrs. Cara Berryman, Exhibitions Coordinator of the Sor­
doni Gallery, who expertly handled the many logistical prob­
lems involved in an undertaking so wide in scope;
Dr. William Sterling, Chairman of the Wilkes College Art
Department, for his exacting work in this catalogue;

BUCKNELL UNIVERSITY, (George M. Jenks, Director)
Mr. Robert S. Capin, President of Wilkes College, whose
cooperation knew no bounds;

LEHIGH UNIVERSITY, (Ricardo Viera, Director of
Exhibitions and Collection)

-

Dr. Thomas Kelly, Dean of External Affairs of Wilkes
College, whose liason work smoothed all problems;

PENNSYLVANIA ACADEMY OF THE FINE ARTS,
(Richard J. Boyle, Director)

Mr. George Pawlush, Director of Wilkes College Public
Relations, and Mrs. Jane Manganella, Assistant Director,
who handled all phases of publicity and public relations;

READING PUBLIC MUSEUM &amp; ART GALLERY,
(Bruce L. Dietrich, Director)
SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY, (Domenic J. lacono, Director)

Mrs. Arnold Rifkin, who contributed her intimate knowl­
edge of The Eight, and assisted in much needed gallery con­
tacts;

VASSAR COLLEGE, (Peter Morrin, Director)

THE WESTMORELAND COUNTY MUSEUM OF ART,
(Paul A. Chew, Director)

Mrs. Esther Davidowitz, for her invaluable suggestions in
promoting this retrospect.

MUSEUM OF ART, PENNSYLVANIA STATE
UNIVERSITY, (William Hull, Director)

And to all members of the Sordoni Art Gallery Advisory
Commission without whose aid and support this presenta­
tion might not have been made possible.

COE-KERR GALLERY INC.
BERRY HILL GALLERIES

We sincerely wish that all visitors who are destined to
view this show, might share the same excitement, we who
gathered it experienced during the past twelve months.

KRAUSHAAR GALLERIES
HIRSCHL &amp; ADLER GALLERIES INC.

Several private area collectors who for personal reasons
chose to remain anonymous.

ALBERT MARGOLIES
Chairman, Advisory Commission

The exhibition of works by the Ash Can School — the
carefully selected product of the Immortal Eight, could not
have been mounted to engage our intelligence; to exhilarate
our feelings; to stimulate our sensual experience, without
the dedicated assistance of the following:

Sordoni Art Gallery
Wilkes College

Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania

2

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE EIGI
Just about a lifetime ago, on February 3,1903
ant exhibition of paintings opened in New YorJ
Gallery. It was to be among a handful of landr
which, over the next few years, would arouse A
out of its complacency and into the mainstream o
century modernism. The exhibition consisted o
eight American artists who were operating eithei
or barely within the artistic establishment of the
ert Henri, John Sloan, William Glackens, George
rett Shinn, Maurice Prendergast, Ernest Lawson,
B. Davies.

Two years later, Henri and Sloan helped to o
other landmark show, the Exhibition of Indepenc
in direct competition with the annual display by t
Academy of Design, that august bastion of ai
conservatism. In 1913, another member of the Ei
B. Davies, became a prime mover of the renowr
Show which brought together, for the first time
hundreds of works by the leading avant-gard
Europe and the United States.
Today's spectator would perceive striking sty
ences between the 1908 and 1913 events. The A
highlighted such radical groups as the Cubists a
ves, while the exhibition of The Eight offered w&lt;
ly representational character, with an occasion;
into Impressionism. Europe's progressive front
on from Impressionism some twenty years earl:
Matisse's Fauvism was officially three years old,
was on the verge of Cubism. The pace of artis
ment in America clearly lagged behind that of
sweeping changes were not to be made ovem
1850s and 1860s the French realist painters C
Manet had turned their backs on the accepted &lt;
romantic traditions of the French Academy, and

�ip Richards, Director of the Sordoni Gallery,
luable aid in the selection process;

Jerryman, Exhibitions Coordinator of the Sorvho expertly handled the many logistical prob­
in an undertaking so wide in scope;

Sterling, Chairman of the Wilkes College Art
or his exacting work in this catalogue;
S. Capin, President of Wilkes College, whose
lew no bounds;
; Kelly, Dean of External Affairs of Wilkes
: liason work smoothed all problems ;
Pawlush, Director of Wilkes College Public
I Mrs. Jane Manganella, Assistant Director,
II phases of publicity and public relations ;

1 Rifkin, who contributed her intimate knowl|ght, and assisted in much needed gallerv conDavidowitz, for her invaluable suggestions in
; retrospect.

lembers of the Sordoni Art Gallen- Advisory-ithout whose aid and support this presentahave been made possible.
y wish that all visitors who are destined to
v, might share the same excitement, we who
erienced during the past twelve months.

1GOLIES
nsory Commission

alienPennsylvania

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE EIGHT

a path for fresh thinking that ultimately drew along it the
Impressionists, the Post-Impressionists, and every radical
movement of the early twentieth century.

Just about a lifetime ago, on February 3,1908, an import­
ant exhibition of paintings opened in New York's Macbeth
Gallery. It was to be among a handful of landmark events
which, over the next few years, would arouse American art
out of its complacency and into the mainstream of twentieth­
century modernism. The exhibition consisted of works by
eight American artists who were operating either outside of,
or barely within the artistic establishment of the time: Rob­
ert Henri, John Sloan, William Glackens, George Luks, Eve­
rett Shinn, Maurice Prendergast, Ernest Lawson, and Arthur
B. Davies.

In America, The Eight performed a similar, if somewhat
belated function. They were spoilers who championed artis­
tic freedom in a society which had held tenaciously and rev­
erently to the academic line. They were not the first non-con­
formists; men such as Thomas Eakins, Winslow Homer, and
Albert Ryder had successfully gone their own way, but they
had not crystallized widespread rebellion; Mary Cassatt and
Whistler had created more radical styles in their time, but
only as expatriates little known or appreciated in their native
land. The Eight, on the other hand, set off the first explosion
to seriously undermine the power structure of the academic
establishment in America.

Two years later, Henri and Sloan helped to organize an­
other landmark show, the Exhibition of Independent Artists,
in direct competition with the annual display by the National
Academy of Design, that august bastion of authoritarian
conservatism. In 1913, another member of the Eight, Arthur
B. Davies, became a prime mover of the renowned Armory
Show which brought together, for the first time in America,
hundreds of works by the leading avant-garde artists of
Europe and the United States.

The show was precipitated when the National Academy
refused to accept works by Sloan and Glackens for their 1907
exhibition. Henri, a member of the Academy jury, could not
prevail upon his colleagues, and in fact, found his own work
luke-warmly accepted. Therefore, he determined to organ­
ize an independent exhibition which would show work of
the more liberal artists. The show of The Eight, as a con­
troversial event, was very well attended, and received as
much favorable as hostile criticism. All in all, and with
$4,000.00 in sales, it was a success.

Today's spectator would perceive striking stylistic differ­
ences between the 1908 and 1913 events. The Armory show
highlighted such radical groups as the Cubists and the Fauves, while the exhibition of The Eight offered work of solid­
ly representational character, with an occasional excursion
into Impressionism. Europe's progressive front had moved
on from Impressionism some twenty years earlier. By 1908,
Matisse's Fauvism was officially three years old, and Picasso
was on the verge of Cubism. The pace of artistic develop­
ment in America clearly lagged behind that of Europe, and
sweeping changes were not to be made overnight. In the
1850s and 1860s the French realist painters Courbet and
Manet had turned their backs on the accepted classical and

The painters of the Eight did not constitute a homogene­
ous group, and they never exhibited all together again. Lawson and Prendergast were strongly influenced by Impres­
sionism, though in quite different ways, and Davies was a
Fantacist, loosely related to the French Symbolists. Only
Henri, Sloan, Shinn, Luks, and Glackens formed a long­
standing and fairly closeknit group. These five shared a
style of briskly painted realism, similar to Manet's, as well
as a passion for ordinary subjects unsentimentally presented,
particularly ones drawn from their own urban surroundings
(hence their later designation "The Ash Can School").

romantic traditions of the French Academy, and had broken
3

�them squarely in a late nineteenth-century aesthetic. It was
as if they had reinvented the wheel, and historians whose
primary criterion for achievement was innovation had diffi­
culty looking at work which was "out of date."

Robert Henri, the eldest of these five, had been their in­
spirational mentor and supporter back in their Philadelphia
days, when he was teaching at the Pennsylvania Academy
and they were working as newspaper artists. With their
journalistic backgrounds, Glackens, Luks, Shinn, and Sloan
responded naturally to Henri's spontaneous realism. These
men had not deliberately set out to break new artistic
ground, and certainly they don't look very radical today.
Indeed, they revered such old masters as Hals, Velasquez,
and Goya, who mated candor with powerfully graphic styles.
Henri and his Philadelphia friends sought to reveal twen­
tieth-century life with the same candor and visual pungency.
The other three members of The Eight were more involved
with poetic transformations of the natural world, but all
eight were ill-treated by an art establishment which still fa­
vored romantic idylls, classical pastiches, and vignettes of
drawing room morality.

Several things have happened in the last decade which
may be changing this approach. For one thing, as we recede
farther from the birth of modernism in Paris, the significance
of its initial moments no longer overshadows so completely
the importance of the hours of assimilation which followed,
especially within the context of the cultural differences
which existed between Europe and America. A somewhat
analogous situation would be the adoption of Caravaggio's
style by younger painters, such as Velasquez, in the seven­
teenth century. The intrinsic power and beauty of Velasquez'
early work are not belittled because it resembles Caravag­
gio's.

There has also been a widespread return to various forms
of naturalism in contemporary art, which places the center
of vanguard taste somewhat closer to The Eight than it has
been for quite a few decades. At the same time, American
scholars (and not just the chauvinistic ones) have begun to
outgrow their inferiority complex, vis-a-vis Europe, when it
comes to any discussion of American art before our own rev­
olutionary period of the forties and fifties. More than ever
before, American art of the past is being looked at on its
own terms and for its inherent strength. As historical cata­
lysts, The Eight have always been recognized; as artists in
their own right, they may now receive a fresh appraisal.

The historical position of The Eight is usually fixed in
terms of the group's catalytic role in bringing about an im­
portant change in America's artistic values. By promoting
liberalized exhibition opportunities for less conventional art­
ists, they opened the door for a much broader exchange of
ideas and tastes. It might not be reaching too far to assign
another significance to these painters, particularly the AshCan contingent. Their brash, bravura, paint-loving techni­
que and their sensitivity to the vital presence of the Ameri­
can urban environment place them closer to the Abstract
Expressionism of the fifties than we might initially suppose.
In a spiritual sense, The Eight were the forerunners of the
New York School which erupted on the international scene
after World War II.

It is the purpose of this exhibition to reveal The Eight on
both these levels. As we experience them together again, we
can perhaps more easily imagine their impact in IPOS.* At
the same time, we can look at them with an open mind, in
the solace of another day.

Yet, except for Prendergast, whose style approached a
Fauve-like abstractness and therefore seemed more modem,
The Eight have rarely enjoyed the limelight in twentieth­
century criticism. Modernist scholars were not inclined to
look beyond the fact that these painters resembled Manet
and his generation more than anyone else, which placed

* The present show, while representing al! the artists of The Eight, does not include
those pictures which were in the original exhibition (with one exception). Many oi
these works are later, and show something of the various directions the artists leek
during their careers.

4

SELECTED BIBLIC
ARTHUR B. DAVIES, 1862-1928.
Introduction by H. K. Prior. V

Institute, Utica, New York, 1962.
BERRY-HILL, H &amp; S. Ernest La~.cn

pressionist. Leigh-on-Sea, Englar

BREUNING, M. Maurice Prendergi
BROWN, M. W. American Paintin
to the Depression. Princeton, 195
CARY, E. L. George Luks. New Yor

DU BOIS, G. P. Ernest Lawson. Nev
DU BOIS, G. P. John Sloan. New Yi
DU BOIS, C. P. William J. Glacken:
THE EIGHT (Exhibition Catalogu
Art, Brooklyn, 1944.

FINK, L. M. and J. C. TAYLOR Aca
Tradition in American Art. Wash

GALLATIN, A. E. John Sloan. New

�th-century aesthetic. It -was
■heel, and historians whose
it was innovation had diffi"outof date."
J in the last decade which
For one thing, as we recede
sm in Paris, the significance
overshadows so completely
ssimilation which followed,
&gt;f the cultural differences
and America. A somewhat
e adoption of Caravaggio's
as Velasquez, in the sevener and beauty of Velasquez'
tuse it resembles Caravag-

;ad return to various forms
rt, which places the center
er to The Eight than it has
t the same time, American
nistic ones) have begun to
;, vis-a-vis Europe, when it
can art before our own revind fifties. More than ever
t is being looked at on its
Irength. As historical cata:n recognized; as artists in
eive a fresh appraisal.

tion to reveal The Eight on
ce them together again, we
their impact in 1908.* At
em with an open mind, in

SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY

GLACKENS, I. William Glackens Er the Ashcan Croup: The

Emergence of Realism in American Art. New York, 1957.

ARTHUR B. DAVIES, 1862-1928. (Exhibition Catalogue).
Introduction by H. K. Prior. Munson-Williams-Proctor
Institute, Utica, New York, 1962.

GOODRICH, L. John Sloan, 1871-1951. New York, 1952.

HENRI, R. The Art Spirit. Philadelphia, 1923.
BERRY-HILL, H. &amp; S. Ernest Lawson, N.A.; American Im­
pressionist. Leigh-on-Sea, England, 1968.

HOMER, W. I. Robert Henri &amp; His Circle. Ithaca, 1969.

BREUNING, M. Maurice Prendergast. New York, 1931.

HUNTER, S. "The Eight-Insurgent Realists," Art in Amer­
ica XLIV. (Fall, 1956), 20-22,56-58.

BROIVN, M. W. American Painting from the Armory Show
to the Depression. Princeton, 1955.

THE LIFE &amp; TIMES OF JOHN SLOAN (Exhibition Cata­
logue). Introduction by H. F, Sloan &amp; B. St. John. Dela­

ware Art Center, Wilmington, 1961.

CARY, E. L. George Luks. New York, 1931.

PERLMAN, BENNARD The Immortal Eight.
New York, 1962.

DU BOIS, G. P. Ernest Lawson. New York, 1932.

DU BOIS, G. P. John Sloan. New Y'ork, 1931.
PHILLIPS, D., ET AL. Arthur B. Davies: Essays on the Man
and His Art. Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1924.

DU BOIS, G. P. William J. Glackens. New York, 1931.

1HE EIGHT ■ Exhibition Catalogue), Brooklyn Museum of

RHYS, H. H. Maurice Prendergast. Cambridge, Massachusettes. 1924.

Art, Brooklyn, 1944.

SCOTT, D. &amp; J. BULLARD John Sloan. Washington, 1971.

FINK, L. M. and J. C. TAYLOR Academy: The Academic

Tradition in American Art. Washington, D. C., 1975.
YOUNG, M. 5. The Eight: The Realist Revolt in American
Painting. New York, 1973.

GALLATIN, A. E. John Sloan. New York, 1925.

I artists cf The Eight, does not include
Bbiticn (Hith ere c*rcf*Ucr,} Man&gt; ot
Bthe various directions the artists took

5

�Show and several other important exhibitions of the Lime.

ROBERT HENRI

I

Henri's success as a painter was matched by that as a
teacher, and his students included such major figures
George Bellows, Edward Hopper, and Man Ray. In terms of
local interest, it may be noted that during the summer of
1902, Henri painted-landscapes at Black Walnut, Pennsyl­
vania, northwest of Wilkes-Barre, at the home of his wife's
parents. "Picnic at Meshoppen," in the present exhibition
dates from this visit. In 1907-08, Henri again travelled to
Wilkes-Barre, to paint portraits of Mr. &amp; Mrs. George Cot­
ton Smith and Miss Edith Reynolds.

(1865-1929 Born in Cincinnati, Ohio)
Henri was the doyen of the Philadelphia, or Ash Can, con­
tingent of The Eight. Having lived most of his adolescence
in the middle and far west, Henri displayed something of the
audacity and rugged individualism typically associated with
the American frontier. His father, a land speculator, had
killed a man in self-defense in Nebraska, but before his
name was cleared, he had changed it and had fled to New
Jersey. His son, Robert Henry Cozad, thus became Robert
Henri (Hen'-rye).

Henri studied at the Pennsylvania Academy under
Thomas Anshutz, one of Thomas Eakins' foremost students.
His natural inclinations for candor and realism flowed easily
into the Eakins tradition. Henri's ambition to excel as an
artist carried him to Paris in 1888 for several years of study
at the Academe Julien, during which time he was temporar­
ily 'attracted to academic painters, such as his teacher Bougereau. His attempts at acceptance into the prestigious
Ecole des Beaux-Arts met with failure until 1891, Gradually,
he gravitated toward the loosely-painted realism of Manet,
as well as to old masters such as Velasquez and Hals.

"Cafe at Night, Paris"
oil
32 x 25%"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.
2.
"Rue de Rennes"
oil
25% x 32"
On loan from Vassar College Art Callery, Poughkeepsie,
New York.

Back in Philadelphia, Henri's charisma drew a large and
faithful following to the weekly open-houses at his studio,
where art, literature, philosophy and politics were discussed
along with regular forays into madcap fun and frivolity.
Henri, Sloan, Glackens, Shinn and Luks cemented their ties
there.

4.
"Picnic at Meshoppen, Pennsylvania, July 4, la02"
oil
26 x 32"
On loan from The Westmoreland County Museum of Art.
Greensburg, Pennsylvania.

After a well-reviewed one-man show at the Pennsylvania
Academy in 1897, selection into three Paris salons, and the
purchase of one of his paintings by the French government,
Henri's place in the art establishment was well-secured.
From that position, he fought to liberalize the establishment,
particularly with regard to exhibition opportunities for
young and progressive artists. He was chief instigator of the
exhibition of The Eight and also had a hand in the Armory

5.
"Dutch Fisherman"
oil
24 x 20"
On loan from The Westmoreland County Museum of Art,
Greensburg, Pennsylvania.
6

Bridgie Beg'
oil
20 x 24"
On loan from a private collection.

�■ important exhibitions of the time,
painter was matched by that as a
its included such major figures as
I Hopper, and Man Ray. In terms of
. noted that during the summer of
dscapes at Black Walnut, Pennsylkes-Barre, at the home of his wife's
hoppen," in the present exhibition
1907-08, Henri again travelled to
ortraits of Mr. &amp; Mrs. George Cot1 Reynolds.

J

iversify, Department of Exhibitions
m, Pennsylvania.

'.allege Art Gallery, Poughkeepsie,

mnsylvania, July 4,1902"

moreland County Museum of Art,
ia.

moreland County Museum of Art,
ia.

3.
"Bridgie Beg"
oil
20 x 24"
On loan from a private collection.
7

�WILLIAM

ARTHUR B. DAVIES

(1870-l°38 Bom m Phi

(1862-1928 Born in Utica, New York)

o

Davies was not one of the Ash-Can painters, and at first
glance it would seem unlikely that he could have had much
in common with them. But like them, he sought to free art
from the grip of the Academy. With a talent for organiza­
tion and a perspicacious eye, he was largely responsible for
putting together the Armory Show in 1913.

ft

j

Davies initially studied landscape painting, then attended
the Chicago Academy of Design, and briefly considered a
career as a draftsman. He went to New York to further his
studies in painting and in 1893 was off to Europe. His
dreamy landscapes, often inspired by myths and poems,
put him into the orbit of late Romantic and Symbolist artists
such as Bocklin, Puvis de Chevannes, and Odilon Redon.

I J
7.
"Seven Nudes"
oil
11 x 213/4"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

After the Armory Show, Davies began to experiment with
Cubism, and also turned more and more to printmaking. His
Cubist work put him irrevocably into the mainstream of
twentieth-century art, and along with Prendergast, made
him the most apparently modem of the painters of The Eight
after World War I.
6.
"Silvered Heights"
oil
18 x 40"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

9.
"Lane with Trees and Fence"
watercolor
4Vz x 7"
' On loan from Lehigh University. Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

8.
"Bam Swallow"
watercolor
7 x 5V2"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania,

10.
"Cows Out to Pasture"
watercolor
4Vs x 6Vs"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibition?
and Collection, Bethlehem. Pennsylvania.
8

Glackens had little formalj
a natural facility and a prod:
naturally suited to the artist/
est in serious painting soon
newspaper colleagues, to He
with whom he came to share
France for a year before settli
a taste for Manet, the Impress
Impressionists.

In 1898, Glackens risked li
War for McClure's Magazin
but mainly from the vantage
heard about the day’s events
Manet, Glackens’ later work
ful vein, similar to Renoir's I
Saco at Conway," for examp
scenes to nudes, landscapes,
Albert Barnes. Glackens wr
procuring many of the maste
and post-impressionist pain
important Barnes Foundation
vania.

11.
"Nude Dressing Hair’
oil
30 x 25"
On loan from Lehigh Univen
and Collection, Bethlehem, P

13.
Mixed Bouquet, White Vast
oil
16 x 14"
On loan from the Kraiishaar (

�WILLIAM GLACKENS
(1870-1938 Bom in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania)
Glackens had little formal art training, but was gifted with
a natural facility and a prodigeous visual memory’. He was
naturally suited to the artist/reporter profession. His inter­
est in serious painting soon led him, via his Philadelphia
newspaper colleagues, to Henri, who encouraged him and
with whom he came to share a studio. Glackens travelled to
France for a year before settling in New York, and developed
a taste for Manet, the Impressionists, and several of the PostImpressionists.

In 1898, Glackens risked life and limb to cover the Cuban
War for McClure’s Magazine. (Luks also covered the War,
but mainly from the vantage point of tl^e taverns, where he
heard about the day's events.) Early under the influence of
Manet, Glackens' later work followed a lighter, more color­
ful vein, similar to Renoir's Impressionism (as seen in "The
Saco at Conway," for example). He also turned from urban
scenes to nudes, landscapes, and still-lifes. A friend of Dr.
Albert Barnes, Glackens was instrumental in selecting and
procuring many of the masterpieces of French impressionist
and post-impressionist painting which now comprise the
important Barnes Foundation Collection in Merion, Pennsyl­
vania.

y, Department of Exhibitions
nsylvania.

[./, Department of Exhibitions
Insylvania.

I/, Department of Exhibitions

fisylvania.

____lXS.1

12.
"The Saco at Conway"
oil
25 x 30"
On loan from the Kraushaar Galleries, New York.

II.
"Nude Dressing Hair"
oil
30 x 25"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

14.
"Nude with Black Stockings"
oil
16J/2 x 13"
On loan from a private collection.

13.
"Mixed Bouquet, White Vase"
oil
16 x 14"
On loan from the Kraushaar Galleries, New York.

15.
"Flowers in a Pitcher"
oil
24 x 18"
On loan from the Berry Hill Galleries, New York.
9

(

�a.

i..

,• j. -

ERNEST LAWSON

j

7-.^

.

(1873-1939 Born in Nova Scotia, Canada)

*■-

•T

Lawson was the only member of the group who was pri­
marily a landscapist. During his lifetime, he travelled widely,
beginning with a stint as a draftsman in Mexico, where his
father was engaged in an engineering project. He later moved
to New York, and studied under the American impression­
ists Twachtman and Weir.

■ -'Vh7,. "A
'

-

-J"/

-

-a"

-

——

In Paris, he came under the influence of European Impres­
sionism as a friend of Sisley. Later trips took him to Spain,
Nova Scotia, and west and midwest of the United States, and
finally to Florida, where he died.
Today, however, we associate Lawson mostly with the up­
per reaches of Manhattan and the Harlem River, where he
was living at the time of the Exhibition. More than any other
painter, he preserved, with poetic substantiality, the charac­
ter of those places. Working with the palette knife, he ma­
nipulated his scumbled impastos into a surface of "crushed
jewels," as one critic described it. And though he is typically
thought of as an impressionist, Lawson shared with the
Symbolists a belief that color should be used to evoke partic­
ular emotions rather than merely depict natural facts.

16.
"High Bridge-Winter"
oil
19 x 24"
On loan from The Reading Public Museum and .Art Gallery,
Reading, Pennsylvania.

17.
"Spring"

19.
"The Blue Hill"
oil
■16 x 197a"
On loan from Vassar College Art Callcry. Poughkeepsie,
New York.

oil
25 x 30"
On loan from the Syracuse University Art Collections, Syra­
cuse, New York.

18.
"The Everglades"
oil
30 x 40"
On loan from Vassar College Art Gallery, Poughkeepsie,
New York.

20.

"The Lock"
oil
177a x 3174"
On loan from The Westmoreland County Museum of -Art,
Greensburg, Pennsylvania.
10

GEORGE 1
(1867-1933 Bern

William;

Luks, the son of a cuitured phys
a free spirit and a mocker of Vi
went to Philadelphia in 1833, appa
ville performer. He briefly attende
emy, and then spent several years
met his fellow Ash-Can painters ir
Philadelphia Press, where thev r
staff of the New York World, lie t
ing comic strip, "The Yellow Kid."
ly involved in painting, he devi
Henri's with dark tonalities and
fondness for seventeenth-century
dent in this work. Luks, only ha
that Frans Hals was incarnate witl
came lighter, more colorful, often ;

With his irrepressible theatrical
was the group's clown prince, gi1
instigating barroom brawls. But h
ly honest. On his impulsive and
claimed, "I can paint with a shoe
lard .,. Guts! Guts! Life! that's mt
22.
"Portrait of a Man"
oil
3072 x 2574 "
On loan from The Westmorelanc
Greensburg, Pennsylvania.
23.
"Beggar Woman"
oil
20 x 16"
On loan from a private collection.

�GEORGE LUKS

('iScv-lP-'-’ Born in Williamsport, Pennsylvania)

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

Luks, the son of a cultured physician, was from the outset
a free spirit and a mocker of Victorian respectability. He
went to Philadelphia in 18S3, apparently to become a vaudeville performer. He briefly attended the Pennsylvania Academy, and then spent several years traveling in Europe. Luks
met his fellow Ash-Can painters in the art department of the
Philadelphia Press, where they regularly met. Joining the
staff of the -Veto York World, he took over the first continuing comic strip, "The Yellow Kid." As he became increasingly involved in painting, he developed a style similar to
Henri's with dark tonalities and broad brushstrokes. His
fondness for seventeenth-century Dutch painting was evi­

dent in this work. Luks, only half-jokingly, used to claim
I that Frans Hals was incarnate within him. His later work be| came lighter, more colorful, often garish.

Bridge-Winter"
■24"
from The
■ng, Pennsylvania.

useur: and Art Gallery,

21.
"Boy with Bowl"
oil
30 x 25"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

With his irrepressible theatrical flair and brashness, Luks
I was the group's clown prince, given to practical jokes and
I instigating barroom brawls. But his painting was unfailing| ly honest. On his impulsive and brutally realistic style, he
claimed, "I can paint with a shoestring dipped in pitch and
lard... Guts! Guts! Life! that's my technique."

Blue Hill"

22.
"Portrait of a Man"

24.
"Old Timer"
oil
3074 x 25"
On loan from the Hirschl and Adler Galleries Inc., Neto
York.

I oil
1972"
’an from ’. assar College Art Gal’er-j, Poughkeepsie,
York.
Lock'­

t317i"
an from The Westmoreland County Museum of Art,
sburg, Pennsylvania.

30% x 25*4"
I Or. loan from The Westmoreland County Museum of Art,
I Greensburg, Pennsylvania.
23.
"Beggar Woman"

25.
"Little Tommy"
oil
23 x 177a "
On loan from the Coe-Kerr Callery Inc., Neto York.

oil
20 x 16"
On loan from a private collection.

ll

�■ ■■--■w.

.

?: :-y:x

■ ■ '

EVERETT SHINN

Ct

(1876-7953 Born in Idstown. New Jersey)

MAURICE PRENDERGAST
(1859-1924 Born in Newfoundland, Canada)

Prendergast, although the eldest of The Eight, was the
most avant-garde in style. He came to serious painting graduauj, _____ o
'
t as a show-card painter in Boston.
ually,
out
Three having
years instarted
Paris (1892-95)
were spent absorbing the lat­
est developments in art created by the Impressionists, the
Neo-Impressionists, the Symbolists, and the Nabis, Despite
the fact that he was a provincial painter in his middle thir­
ties, Prendergast gravitated easily to this radical current.
By 1900 he had developed a personal style reminiscent of
Pierre Bonnard's. Both men shared a love for the festive
promenades and graceful landscapes of urban parks. The
dancing rhythms of Prendergast's bright patchworked color
exuded an air of bourgeois elegance. Perhaps more than any
other American painter of the first decade of the twentieth
century, Prendergast approached the lyrical color explora­
tions of Matisse. His abstractness, lack of "finish," and lav­
ish color caused his work to be the most strongly attacked

by the critics of The Eight, but this was no deterrant to a
mature and independent spirit. Later on, he experimented
with a somewhat pointillist technique of painting, partly de­
rived from Paul Signac. From beginning to end, Prendergast
remained an individualist who charted his own artistic
course.
"Marblehead Rocks," in the present show, was in the

original exhibition of The Eight.

Everett Shinn, the youiue.t of The Eight, had the mt
varied career. In addition to painting and illustration. Shit
at one time or another, teas involved in set design, moti
picture art direction and playwriting.

i

%

i

27.
, „
"Marblehead Rocks
watercolor
14 x 10"
On loan from a private collection.

Shinn met the other Philadelphia painters at the Penns
vania Academy, which he attended while working as an
lustrator for the Philadelphia Press Ilis ambition, upon i
grating to New York City, was to establish himself ai
fashionable illustrator for the better magazines and public
ing houses. His pastel of the Metropolitan Opera House
a snowstorm, rendered overnight to meet the deadline
landing a job with Harper's Weekly, helped to launch h
toward the fulfillment of his ambition. Unlike the other A‘
Can painters, Shinn gravitated to the fashionable sections
town rather than the humbler ones.

Art, University Park, Pennsylvania.

His interest in the theater was stirred by his trip to Pr
in 1901, and the* pictures he showed with The Eight indue
stage scenes. Partly because of this interest, he was parti
larly drawn to the art of Degas. He also shared with Dei
a love for pastel as a medium, two examples of which app
in the present show.

29.
"Cresent Beach"
oil
10% x 13/16"
On loan from Bucknell University, Ellen Clarke Bertrand Li- :

31.
"Strong Man, Clown and Dancer"
oil
10 x 8"
On loan from the Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine A

28.
"Bathers in a Cove"

oil
20
27% from
"
On Xloan
Pennsylvania State University, Museum

26.
"La Rouge: Portrait of Miss Edith King"
oil
28/z x 31/2"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions

brary, Lewisburg, Pennsylvania.

Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

30.
"Paris Omnibus"
oil
10/4 x 13%6"
On loan from Bucknell University, Ellen Clarke Bertrand Li- '

32.
"Clown"
oil
9 x 7&gt;/z"
On loan from Vassar College Art Callery, Poughkeep

brary, Lewisburg, Pennsylvania.

and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.
12

of

New York.

�EVERETT SHINN
" ■ -if-i--j-. -d

r-,-

'ection.

(1876-1953 Born in Woodstown, New Jersey)

Everett Shinn, the youngest of The Eight, had the most
varied career. In addition to painting and illustration, Shinn,
at one time or another, was involved in set design, motion
picture art direction and play writing.

Shinn met the other Philadelphia painters at the Pennsyl­
vania Academy, which he attended while working as an il­
lustrator for the Philadelphia Press. His ambition, upon mi­
grating to New York City, was to establish himself as a
fashionable illustrator for the better magazines and publish­
ing houses. His pastel of the Metropolitan Opera House in
a snowstorm, rendered overnight to meet the deadline for
landing a job with Harper's Weekly, helped to launch him
toward the fulfillment of his ambition. Unlike the other AshCan painters, Shinn gravitated to the fashionable sections of
town rather than the humbler ones.

tia State University, Museum of
isylvania.

His interest in the theater was stirred by his trip to Paris
in 1901, and the pictures he showed with The Eight included
stage scenes. Partly because of this interest, he was particu­
larly drawn to the art of Degas. He also shared with Degas
a love for pastel as a medium, two examples of which appear
in the present show.

iversity, Ellen Clarke Bertrand Livania.

31.
"Strong Man, Clown and Dancer"
oil
10 x 8"
On loan from the Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine Arts,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

liversity, Ellen Clarke Bertrand LiIvania.

32.
"Clown"
oil
9 x 71/2"
On loan from Vassar College Art Gallery, Poughkeepsie,
New York.

34.
"Snowstorm, Washington Square"
pastel
25 Vz x 19V2"
On loan from a private collection.

33.
"The Green Ballet, 1943"
oil
19% x 30"
On loan from The Westmoreland County Museum of Art,
Greensburg, Pennsylvania.
35.
"Startled Nude"
pastel
15 x 14V1"
On loan from a private collection.

13

�37.
"Horace Traubel"

JOHN SLOAN
(1871-1951 Born in Lock Haven, Pennsylvania)

oil
32 x 26"
On loan from the Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine Arts,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

Sloan was the "slow starter" of the Ash-Can group, ut
one of its most durable successes. He continued to work as
an artist/reporter for Philadelphia newspapers long after
his journalist colleagues in The Eight had turned to painting.
He was the last of them to move to New York, and the only
one never to go to Europe. For a long time he received little
attention as a painter, and sold his first painting only after

38.
"Self Portrait"
oil
24 x 20"
On loan from the Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine Arts,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

he was past forty.

His manner of painting was also slower than that of his
Philadelphia friends. He had less facility with the quick
study than men such as Luks and Glackens, and during his
newspaper career concentrated on illustrations for the Sun­
day sections rather than attempting on-the-spot recordings
of fast-breaking news. On the other hand his work took on
an increasing structural solidity, and he gained early recogni­
tion as an illustrator with his art-nouveau drawings and his
etchings for novels.

39.
"Gloucester Harbor"

oil
26 x 32"
On loan from Syracuse University Art Collections, Syracuse,
New York.

When he began his career as a serious painter in New
York, Sloan turned to the realities of the urban environment
for inspiration. So candid and forceful was his work that
several paintings submitted to an exhibition in 1906 were
rejected for their "vulgarity." Sloan's deep attachment to
the humbler elements of urban society aroused more than
artistic interest in them, and he ran for the State Assembly
in 1908 on the Socialist ticket, but was defeated. In 1912 he
became art editor for the socialist magazine, The Masses.
His social consciousness continued to influence his painting
and illustration for several years, but after World War I, he
turned more fully to formal problems, such as the study of
the nude. Like his own mentor, Henri, Sloan became an in­
fluential teacher, whose students included such later mas­
ters as Alexander Calder, Adolph Gottlieb, Barnett New­
man, and Reginald Marsh.

40.
"Dolly Reading"
oil
20 x 24"
On loan from a private collection.

36.
"Balancing Rock, Gloucester Harbor"
oil
26Vz x 32 Vz"
On loan from Lehigh University, Department of Exhibitions
and Collection, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.
14

�idemy of the Fine Arts,

ademy of the Fine Arts,

,rt Collections, Syracuse,

Ir"

Department of Exhibitions
Ifoania.

�Director
J. PHILIP RICHARDS
Coordinator
CARA BERRYMAN

Advisory Commission
MR. ROBERT CAPIN

MRS. STANLEY DAVIES
MRS. CHARLES EPSTEIN
MR. RICHARD FULLER

DR. THOMAS KELLY
MRS. ALLAN KLUGER
MR. MICHAEL KOLESAR
mrs. john

McDonald

MR. ALBERT MARGOLIES
MR. ANDREW SORDONI, III
DR. WILLIAM STERLING

WILKES COLLEGE SORDONI ART GALLERY
WILKES-BARRE, PENNSYLVANIA 18766

16

�llliffl
100D183318

MILKES COLLEGE LIBRARY

��</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <collection collectionId="24">
      <elementSetContainer>
        <elementSet elementSetId="1">
          <name>Dublin Core</name>
          <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
          <elementContainer>
            <element elementId="50">
              <name>Title</name>
              <description>A name given to the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367364">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery Exhibition Programs, 1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="41">
              <name>Description</name>
              <description>An account of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367365">
                  <text>Exhibition programs created by the Sordoni Art Gallery from 1973 to the present. &#13;
&#13;
Digitized by Wilkes University Archives interns, Zachary Mendoza and Sophia Kruspha. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="39">
              <name>Creator</name>
              <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367366">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="48">
              <name>Source</name>
              <description>A related resource from which the described resource is derived</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367367">
                  <text>Wilkes University</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="45">
              <name>Publisher</name>
              <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367368">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="40">
              <name>Date</name>
              <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367369">
                  <text>1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="47">
              <name>Rights</name>
              <description>Information about rights held in and over the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367370">
                  <text>Wilkes University retains copyright of these exhibition programs. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="44">
              <name>Language</name>
              <description>A language of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367371">
                  <text>English</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="51">
              <name>Type</name>
              <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367372">
                  <text>Exhibition programs, flyers, and calendars. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="42">
              <name>Format</name>
              <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="400772">
                  <text>PDF</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
          </elementContainer>
        </elementSet>
      </elementSetContainer>
    </collection>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404706">
                <text>1979 March 9 - April 1 An Exhibition of paintings by The Eight</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="49">
            <name>Subject</name>
            <description>The topic of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404707">
                <text>Exhibition program</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="39">
            <name>Creator</name>
            <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404708">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404709">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404710">
                <text>1979 March 9 - April 1</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="42">
            <name>Format</name>
            <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404711">
                <text>PDF</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="51">
            <name>Type</name>
            <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404712">
                <text>Exhibition Book</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="51518" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="47090">
        <src>https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/files/original/bfb32e94c237890f6135edd7f59012d7.pdf</src>
        <authentication>c5ddf8940566b2aeda263dccda889514</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="404697">
                    <text>!

Ir

gARCHIVES

I SQR.D GA

! 2269.2
N43C6
I
1999

�THE COLLECTOR AS BOOKBINDER
The Piscatorial Bindings of S. A. Neff, Jr.

�ITINERARY

Cleveland Museum of Natural History
Cleveland, Ohio
January 9 through March 14, 1999

THECOLLECTC
The Piscatorial Bi:

Sordoni Art Gallery
Wilkes University
Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania
June 13 through August 15,1999

Rochester Institute of Technology, Cary Collection
Rochester, New York
October 7 through December 17, 1999

American Museum of Natural Flistory
New York, New York
April 7 through July 2, 2000

The American Museum of Fly Fishing
Manchester, Vermont
July 9 through September 29, 2000

Essays by
Elisabeth R. Agro
Stanley 1 Grand
Binder’s Statement, Catak
S A. Neff, Jr.

New York State Museum
Albany, New York
October 6 through December 10, 2000

Sordoni Art Caller. • Wilkes I.

�THE COLLECTOR AS BOOKBINDER
The Piscatorial Bindings of S. A. Neff, Jr.

Essays by
Elisabeth R. Agro

Stanley I Grand

Binder's Statement, Catalogue Entries, and Glossary by
S. A. Neff, Jr.

E.S. FARLEY LIBRARY
WILKES UNIVERSITY
WILKES-BARRE, PA

Sordoni Art Gallery • Wilkes University • Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania

�6-A
.•

-L.

N L/ 3 *_

BINDER'S STATEMEN T
S. A. Neft Ir

I ci q

Copyright © 1999 Sordoni Art Gallery, Wilkes University

All rights reserved
1700 copies were printed
by Becotte &amp; Gershwin
Catalogue design: John Beck
Photography: Jeff Cornelia
Typeface: Palatine
ISBN 0-94294S-14-X
Front Cover: A Treasury of Reels, Vol. I (Front)
Back Cover: A Treasury of Reels, Vol. I (Back)

&lt;11 cwkk in the exhibition was produced over a tv
period beginning in ll»si. Both the exhibition am
logue have been arranged in chronological order
viewer to •.*■* the development ot the concept- and the ti
the work has been created for mv per-onal angling hbrar
it is the culmination ol one angler’s passion tor fishing I;
flv. As will be clear to the viewer, m.inv ot the sets contai
beyond the written word In fact, ome ot the set- bvioni
miniature mil: &lt;-uin that attests to and supports the w ritti
Included in the various sets are photograph ot angling &lt;
actual fishing flies and the materials used for dressing th
angling arid.ids, and paraphernalia.
1 was introdui ed to bookbinding in mv mid-forties, an
beginning I km w this &lt; rilt would be .&lt; &gt;me one ■ &gt;f th* mo
directions in my life Asm1, kill- developed I r* aiized ft
twenty-five year's experience m graphic design in.id'.ert
trained me to be a bookbinder 1.a rived into the w* rid ol
with a well-dec eloped as-th, tic sen.-* a kec-nlv h i.-.d he
coordination, a sense ot proportion, and patience.
A sense of history prompted me to look cl* sely at the t
developed bv bookbinders of past centuries These book!
bookmakers have built a very -el .1 n &lt;u:.dation. and I h.:
behooved to continue to build O'- that inheritance 1 have
re-.pect for the rules of that rich tradition t*&lt; attempt to br
to negate them altogether. My direct!
as a b vkb.nder i
creative as possible while firmly remaining witSn th ■ p*

�BINDER'S STATEMENT
S. A. Neff, Jr.

in the exhibition was produced over a twelve-year
period beginning in 1986. Both the exhibition and the cata­
logue have been arranged in chronological order to enable the
viewer to see the development of the concepts and the techniques. All
the work has been created for my personal angling library. In a sense,
it is the culmination of one angler's passion for fishing for trout with a
fly. As nnll be clear to the viewer, many of the sets contain material far
beyond the written word. In fact, some of the sets become a kind of
miniature museum that attests to and supports the written word.
Included in the various sets are photographs of angling environments,
actual fishing flies and the materials used for dressing them, letters,
angling artifacts, and paraphernalia.
I was introduced to bookbinding in my mid-forties, and from the
beginning I knew this craft would become one of the most significant
directions in my life. As my skills developed, I realized that my
twenty-five year's experience in graphic design inadvertently had
trained me to be a bookbinder. I arrived into the world of bookbinding
with a well-developed aesthetic sense, a keenly honed hand-to-eye
coordination, a sense of proportion, and patience.
A sense of history7 prompted me to look closely at the traditions
developed by bookbinders of past centuries. These bookbinders and
bookmakers have built a very solid foundation, and I have always felt
behooved to continue to build on that inheritance. I have far too much
respect for the rules of that rich tradition to attempt to break them, or
to negate them altogether. My direction as a bookbinder is to be as
creative as possible, while firmly remaining within the perimeters of
he work

these traditions. Some people think of my work as design binding, but
I consider it fine binding because I have chosen to follow the tradi­
tions set by past generations of bookbinders.
Almost from the start of my career, I have been intrigued with the
concept of creating containers to house bindings and other volumes.
Many of the containers take the form of a drop-back box covered with
goatskin. All are decorated to various degrees, and this decoration
generally sets a theme for the housed volumes.
In juxtaposition with experimenting with container forms, I have
continued to explore techniques for decorating them. Although a detailed
description of techniques evolved for the decoration of the containers
and bindings is inappropriate in a catalogue of this nature, some
bookbinders and viewers may be interested in a brief description.
In the late 1980s I began working with Japanese dyed paper and gilt
paper to create decorative panels used on covers as well as doublures
(decoration on the inside of the cover). As this method was refined,
the panels became more complex; and some comprised hundreds of
shapes. The process is begun by making a detailed drawing on tracing
paper. Appropriate colors are then selected from a chart of dyed paper
swatches. Next the images in the drawing are traced onto the dyed
papers and cut out. When all the shapes have been cut out, they are
glued to a piece of gilt paper then put under a light weight to ensure
that they dry evenly. Later, each shape is carefully cut out, allowing a
border of 1 /16". When all the shapes have been prepared, they are
glued in position on a piece of bristol board, commencing with the sky
and finishing with the foreground. The process is not unlike assem-

j J -'••’iJjQ'

5

�bling a puzzle. When the panel is completed, it is trimmed to size and
glued into a slightly depressed area in the goatskin cover or doublure.
As I continued to become familiar with working in goatskin, I began
to explore the possibilities of using it for decoration. The first experi­
ments were done with flat on-lays (thinly pared goatskin pasted onto
the binding) with blind-tooled edges. Then I worked with raised on­
lays (thinly pared goatskin glued onto four-ply Bristol board shapes).
When working with either type of on-lay (separately or in conjunc­
tion) I expanded the decoration with either blind or gilt tooling. At
first I executed the tooling with conventional tools, then I learned of
the flexibility of the Ascona tool, a specially cut brass tool used with
stiff paper templates as guides. This method allows a binder to tool
curvilinear lines more fluid than those made with conventional tools.
By working with these tools and multiple, interlocking templates, I
blind-tooled complex designs onto goatskin covers. Sometimes the

blind-tooled lines do not give enough definition to the design, but I
resolve this problem by gluing very narrow strips of goatskin, of a
contrasting color, into the linear depressions. This allows me to draw
with
leather.
One
experiment leads to another, and sometimes another technique
of decoration emerges within a relatively short period. Rarely have 1
set out to create something different. Rather, I follow a direction
dictated by the content of the text, the materials, and the tools.
At the risk of sounding self-serving, I must say that although my
containers and bindings may appear to be nearly flawless, the proce­
dure has never been flawless. There have been occasions when I have
needed to repeat a process several times before achieving a satisfac­
tory result. Bookbinding is an old-world craft that requires an essen­
tial discipline and devotion. In this computer age it is almost an
anomaly to work patiently with one's hands, using simple tools.

S. A. NEFF, JR., ANGLING ARTISAN
Caught by Trout, Piscatorial Books, a
Elisabeth R. Agro
Carnegie Museum of Art

of S. A. Neff, Jr., piscatorial bookbinder, is alluring for
those who appreciate masterh design, high quality binding,
and (perhaps) trout. At a mere glimpse of his work, the viewei
mesmerized—transfixed by each binding's exacting beauty. Neff
literally ensnares (or should I say hooks and reel?? &gt; his viewer into 1
world, assembled in goatskin and Japanese paper The essence or 5.
Neff, Jr., consists of three inseparable and integral elements: he is a
devout angler, a collector of angling books and a piscatorial fine binde:
The piscatorial bindings of S. A. Neff. Jr. illustrate not onlv his
passion for angling for tn&gt;ut and collecting books on anglinu but al*
his work as a fine binder for his personal collection. Neff's fane . ~
fly-tying and angling for trout began when he w as fifteen.: in the tor
five years since then, he has waded trout rivers throughout the L nit
States, Ireland England and Central Europe Because he warwd ..
know the trout ana its environment Neff pecan to collect old anglir
books: with his ;:r*. purchase, at the age cf-twvnri he embarked or,
education in aquatic entomology, the devising and dressing of flies
the hand-c: at ting of fly rods, anti the under# ending *.
UStorv .&gt; \
f c id
Iv . w
c . ttne
caught upio, ..*.-: ■ : *. ■ ■- gnlti.-t :ci c*b.’&gt;'ks He
eo tv
Priisburgc t*ib!io.&lt;'.,&lt;*- ot
;:w-ctwOec"
omtains two th w-.-rc
J.
csident tortwo. r1•;
x* ' ■ . ■ v toe '
:.!
'
&lt;? : :* -. .me. ’&gt;
. c..&lt;.
he work

�definition to the design, but I
irrow strips of goatskin, of a
ssions. This allows me to draw

,d sometimes another technique
ely short period. Rarely have I
lather, I follow a direction
materials, and the tools.
I must say that although my
o be nearly’ flawless, the procejve been occasions when I have
es before achieving a satisfac■ld craft that requires an essentnputer age it is almost an
hands, using simple tools.

S. A. NEFF, JR., ANGLING ARTISAN
Caught by Trout, Piscatorial Books, and Fine Binding
Elisabeth R. Agro
Carnegie Museum of Art

of S. A. Neff. Jr., piscatorial bookbinder, is alluring for
those who appreciate masterly design, high quality binding,
and (perhaps) trout At a mere glimpse of his work, the viewer is
mesmerized—transfixed by each binding's exacting beauty. Neff
I literally ensnares (or should I say hooks and reels?) his viewer into his
world, assembled in goatskin and Japanese paper. The essence of S. A.
Neff. Jr., consists of three inseparable and integral elements: he is a
devout angler, a collector of angling books, and a piscatorial fine binder.
The piscatorial bindings of S. A. Neff, Jr. illustrate not only his
passion for angling for trout and collecting books on angling but also
his work as a fine binder for his personal collection. Neff's fancy for
fly-tyring and angling for trout began when he was fifteen; in the fortyfive years since then, he has traded trout rivers throughout the United
States, Ireland, England, and Central Europe. Because he wanted to
know the trout and its environment, Neff began to collect old angling
books: with his first purchase, at the age of twenty, he embarked on an
education in aquatic entomology, the devising and dressing of flies,
the hand-crafting of fly rods, and the understanding of piscatorial
history. As Neff's collection of old angling books grew, he became
caught up in their history' and significance as books. He joined the
Pittsburgh Bibliophiles, of which he was a member for seventeen
•. ears and president for two. His library' now contains two thousand
volumes on fish and fishing, focusing on books prior to the twentieth
he work

century, with some dating as far back as 1600. This collecting enthusi­
asm propelled him to the next logical step: the care and restoration of
his fine collection.
In 1982—in order to make small repairs on some of the books in his
growing collection—Neff took a few simple workshops on binding
methods in the Pittsburgh area. Reflecting on his late start as a book­
binder, Neff often refers to T. J. Cobden-Sanderson (1840-1922),
known as the Father of Modern Bookbinding, who also began his
career as a bookbinder at middle age. Realizing that he would not
have enough time to learn all the various methods and styles of
binding, and being an autodidact by nature, Neff struck out on his
own, teaching himself procedures that would be most applicable to
the care and repair of his personal library. Neff soon realized that his
twenty-five years as a graphic designer and illustrator, coupled with
his long experience as an angler, provided him with the skills and
design sensibility needed to become a bookbinder: "My development
of hand-to-eye coordination during my longtime activities as a de­
signer and flytier inadvertently trained me in bookbinding."
Since 1982, Neff has continually added new methods, techniques,
and materials to his bookbinding repertoire. Initially, he worked in
quarter- and half-leather, then in full leather with simple gilt-stamped
designs (the stamping dies are of his own design). After taking a
vellum workshop in 1985, he began creating half- and full-vellum
*7

�J

bindings. With this new skill, Neff created his first multiple set of
bindings and boxes for .4 Book ofSmall Flies (Figures 1-4). This unique
edition, originallv a two-volume set, comprises four volumes bound in
full vellum over raised foundations with marbled paper panels and
on-lavs of goatskin. Neff created two additional volumes, which
include objects bevond the text such as materials used in making flies,
and photographs taken bv Neff based on the text of the book. This set
was the first four-volume set of angling books to contain a related
grouping of all these piscatorial materials. A Book of Small Flies marks
the beginning of Neff's serious commitment to bookbinding: it was
the first work Neff exhibited nationally and was selected for inclusion
at the juried Guild of Book Workers' 1986 national exhibition.
In 1988, Neff began to experiment with Japanese dyed paper to create
decorative panels, using it in conjunction with Japanese gilt paper to
provide a linear definition between the shapes. He used this technique
on a set of two bindings in a box, A Modern Dry-Fly Code, second edition,
and In the Ring ofthe Rise, both by' Vincent C. Marinaro, published in
1970 and 1976 respectively (Figures 6 &amp; 7). The two volumes are found
within a drop-back box portraying the Cumberland Valley, which
provides the viewer with a glimpse of what is contained inside. The
image found on the decorative panels of each binding represents the
subject of that volume. A Modern Dry-Fly Code investigates the meth­
ods of flv fishing on the Letort Spring Run in the Cumberland Valley
in Pennsylvania. Neff portrays this small river, including an image of
the predominant variety of mayfly, the Ephemerella dorothea (Figure 7).
He depicts the stream in detail on the panels for In the Ring of the Rise,
which throroughty examines the feeding habits of the Letort trout.
Neff includes an illustration of a trout that has just risen to the surface
for a mayfly, resulting in a rise-form, or "ring of the rise" (Figure 7).
The viewer is first struck by the image of the Cumberland Valley on
the box. Neff says, "The viewer moves into the valley when looking at
the covers of the Code, and finally to the river's surface with the covers
of the Ring." This application of pictorial panels to foretell the contents
of a box and bindings was the beginning of a style formula for Neff.
Neff further developed this innovative pictorial panel technique.
The application of panel decoration in combination with box sets

8 • The Collector c* Bookbinder

containing two or more volumes imparts a particular expression to
Neff's work. He says, "I have always been interested in creating sets
of books, rather than simply putting a cover, albeit a decorative one,
on a book." Neff calls these sets "containers" because they usually
hold items such as actual fishing flies, photographs, letters, and reels
in addition to the text of a book or essay. As an observer of Neff's
work, I am more inclined to call these box sets "environments." Each
panel draws the viewer into the subject explored within a box and
volume. The specific angling materials placed within each box further
the experience of the subject. Giving the subject matter of each book
careful consideration, Neff essentially documents the specific angling
environment on the panels of the box set and the bindings it contains.
The three-volume set Miniature Nymphs: A Chapterfrom "The Masters on
the Nymph" (1989) exemplifies this angling environment (Figures 8-12).
This set contains text, actual trout flies dressed by Neff and materials
for making them, manuscript, photographs used in the text, and
correspondence with the publisher. On the box are scenes of limestone
and freestone rivers, two of the earth's three river types. The highly
detailed images of a brown trout in a limestone river, rainbow trout in
a freestone river, and nymphs on the bottom of the rivers appear
individually on the bindings of each volume. The pictorial panels
found on this set inform the viewer of the contents of each volume.
In 1990, Neff began experimenting with full goatskin bindings over
raised foundations, flat on-lays, raised on-lays, and blind tooling. Neff
integrated these new techniques with his decorative panels and
boxed-set formula. Catskill Rivers, written by Austin M. Francis (1983),
was bound in 1991 and is a product of this integration (Figures 15-18).
The covers on the box and volume are incredibly fine. Neff describes
the design as follows:

The panel on the front cover depicts the trout of the Catskill
rivers; the brook trout (leaping downward) declined at the
end of the nineteenth century, to be replaced by the brown
trout (moving upward). The vivid colors of the panel are in
direct contrast with the subtleties of the binding. The dark
green on-lays quietly set the scene on the book's cover for

the three bands of bright blue raised on-lay
the Catskil! rivers.

. mbolizin,

Revealing the connection between the box and the binding,
states, "There is no apparent relationship between the box cot
binding [at first glance] until the book is opened to reveal the
doublure portraying a scene on one of the rivers." This Catski
environment is made whole by a second river scene, which a;
the back doublure, and aquatic insects, which are found in th,
ground of each panel.
A set consisting of two volumes housed in an inner and ou(
made for Rodolphe L. Coignev's Izank Walton: .4 Nor Btbliogn
1653-19S7 (1989) represents Neff's interest in creating twentis
century designs based on seventeenth- and eighteenth-centur
designs (Figures 23-28). "As a twentieth-centurv binder and I
designer, I can immerse myself in period design, but to attem
produce a similar design would simply be making a facsimile
actually a personal aesthetic effort," states Neff. Therefore, he
rated these bindings with a twentieth-centurv version of a sevt
centurv panel design.
Of particular note in this container are the interior of the ot
and the cover of the inner box, which form a triptych (Figure
When the viewer opens the box, he or she finds a scene depic
Charles Cotton's Fishing House, Piscaforibus sacrum, on the Ri
Dove in England, which ran through Cotton's estate. An angl
and close friend of Walton, Cotton memorialized their friends
the cypher "IWCC" inscribed on the keystone above the door
Piscatoribus sacrum. Neff uses this cypher as a decorative elem
the box and binding, thus linking them to Walton, Cotton, Pis
sacrum, and the River Dove. Two aquatic insects found on the
long before the seventeenth century' are also in full view in th:
container. In this boxed set, Neff creates a twentieth-century ’
based on a seventeenth-century binding style, effectively juxt.
two periods. He accomplishes this by binding both volumes i
seventeenth-century style, including a doublure panel depict!
angler of that period and another portraying a modern angler

�rts a particular expression to
?een interested in creating sets
cover, albeit a decorative one,
liners" because they usually
photographs, letters, and reels
ly. As an observer of Neff's
box sets "environments." Each
:t explored within a box and
; placed within each box further
re subject matter of each book
documents the specific angling
set and the bindings it contains.
’hs: A Chapterfrom "The Masters on
ng environment (Figures 8-12).
; dressed by Neff and materials
raphs used in the text, and
n the box are scenes of limestone
5 three river types. The highly
limestone river, rainbow trout in
?ottom of the rivers appear
nlume. The pictorial panels
: the contents of each volume,
with full goatskin bindings over
1 on-lays, and blind tooling. Neff
his decorative panels and
tten by Austin M. Francis (1983),
f this integration (Figures 15—18).
! incrediblv fine. Neff describes

nets the trout of the Catskill
iownward) declined at the
&gt; be replaced by the brown
id colors of the panel are in
s of the binding. The dark
ne on the book's cover for

the three bands of bright blue raised on-lays symbolizing
the Catskill rivers.

Revealing the connection between the box and the binding, Neff
states, "There is no apparent relationship between the box cover and
binding [at first glance] until the book is opened to reveal the front
doublure portraying a scene on one of the rivers." This Catskill river
environment is made whole by a second river scene, which appears on
the back doublure, and aquatic insects, which are found in the fore­
ground of each panel.
A set consisting of two volumes housed in an inner and outer box
made for Rodolphe L. Coigney's Izaak Walton: A New Bibliography
1653-1987 (1989) represents Neff's interest in creating twentieth­
century designs based on seventeenth- and eighteenth-century panel
designs (Figures 23-28). "As a twentieth-century binder and binding
designer, I can immerse myself in period design, but to attempt to
produce a similar design would simply be making a facsimile, and not
actually a personal aesthetic effort," states Neff. Therefore, he deco­
rated these bindings with a twentieth-century version of a seventeenth­
century panel design.
Of particular note in this container are the interior of the outer box
and the cover of the inner box, which form a triptych (Figure 24).
When the viewer opens the box, he or she finds a scene depicting
Charles Cotton's Fishing House, Piscatoribus sacrum, on the River
Dove in England, which ran through Cotton's estate. An angler, poet,
and close friend of Walton, Cotton memorialized their friendship in
the cypher "IWCC" inscribed on the keystone above the door to
Piscatoribus sacrum. Neff uses this cypher as a decorative element on
the box and binding, thus linking them to Walton, Cotton, Piscatoribus
sacrum, and the River Dove. Two aquatic insects found on the river
long before the seventeenth century are also in full view in this
container. In this boxed set, Neff creates a twentieth-century version
based on a seventeenth-century binding style, effectively juxtaposing
two periods. He accomplishes this by binding both volumes in a
seventeenth-century style, including a doublure panel depicting an
angler of that period and another portraying a modern angler in the

same setting, using the IWCC cypher as a decorative motif, and
including contemporary photography of what he calls "the relatively
unspoiled beauty" of Dove Dale and the river.
Neff designed this set to be experienced in stages, which he feels
makes it "more complex and interesting than a simple binding." The
panel decorations, together with the binding techniques described
here, aid Neff in achieving his goal of developing a sense of move­
ment through space and history within his containers.
Since 1992, Neff has continued to excel at binding and creating
pictorial panels. His recent bindings and containers include A Treasury
of Reels (1995, Figures 36-40), The Angling Letters of S. A. Neff, ]r. and J.
S. Hewitson (1997, Figures 41-44), and Angling in Hibernia (1998,
Figures 45-49). A Treasury of Reels is a two-volume set that contains
text and actual nineteenth-century and early twentieth-century fly
reels. These are housed in a drop-back box, which is embellished by
designs that mimic ten actual reel designs. The volumes are contained
in a chest with a bas-relief of a brook trout on the top. Angling Letters
is a grouping of correspondence, dating back to 1965, between Neff
and Hewitson. Neff has organized each decade in a drop-back box.
Also included are photographs Neff took to illustrate a point from one
letter for each year of the correspondence. Angling in Hibernia is an
autobiographical work of Neff's experiences of angling in Ireland.
This impressive five-volume set contains text, related photographs,
flies tied by Neff, materials used for making Irish trout flies, and a life
box containing piscatorial objects. These works represent Neff's
persistence in striving to perfect his skills as a binder and binding
designer. The combination of Neff as artist, angler, collector, and
binder—coupled with his vivacity and dedication—result in the
achievement of high quality in his work.
Although the combination of talents and interests Neff exhibits
would seem to be unique, his work can be placed within a historical
framework. Thomas Gosden (1780-1840) should easily come to mind
for bibliophiles who collect sporting books. Gosden described himself
as a bookbinder, publisher, and printseller. Like Neff, he was an
outdoor enthusiast and a lover of books who brought his enthusiasm
for angling to his work. Gosden is best known as a binder whose
The Piscatorial Bindings of S. A. Neff, Jr.

• 9

�angling books are stamped with small piscatorial and emblematic
designs. In 1819, he published T. P. Lathey's poem The Angler, which
he embellished with a full-length portrait of himself outfitted with a
fishing rod and net as a frontispiece. In this engraving, Gosden signals
the depth of his knowledge of angling and angling literature by
including the IWCC cypher of Walton and Cotton on the plinth upon
which he is leaning. The portrait verifies William Loring Andrews's
description of Gosden in An English XIX Century Sportsman, Bibliopole
and Binder ofAngling Books (1906) as "a true disciple of Izaak Walton."
As a fly-fisherman of trout, a book collector, and a binder, Neff has
continued in the tradition of Gosden as a twentieth-century "sporting
bookbinder" and enthusiast.
Since Gosden, many' others have produced distinctive angling
books. Some angling authors—such as William Blacker (1814-1856),
W. H. Aldam (active mid-nineteenth century), Preston Jennings (18931962), and Charles Phair (1875-1943)—took their published works a
step further by incorporating flies and fly-tying materials into their
texts. Blacker and Aldam, both British, published notable works in

10 • The Collector as Bookbinder

1842 and 1843 and 1876. They were followed by the Americans
Jennings and Phair in 1935 and 1937 respectively. Although these
books were deluxe editions, they were commercial in nature. In the
twentieth century, firms such as Robert Riviere &amp; Son and Sangorski &amp;
Sutcliffe were known to have produced magnificent bindings, but
their binders were usually not anglers. Neff has followed in the
tradition of Blacker, Aldam, Jennings, and Phair by incorporating
angling materials into his angling "environments."
As a collector and binder, Neff can be placed in a special category of
twentieth-century collectors of angling books who execute fine
bindings for their personal collections. The depth of his knowledge of
angling and of the content of each book in his library—along with his
design expertise—brings the quality of his work to a high level. Each
binding reflects his base of knowledge; each design is unique and
particular to the subject of the book. His pictorial bindings are excep­
tional, superbly executed, and innovative. S. A. Neff, Jr., guides the
viewer through an exploration of the history' of angling for trout. His
work becomes a lens into this fascinating and special world.

ANGLING BOUND
The Bindings of S. A. Neff, Jr.
Stanley I Grand
Wilkes University

he "essence" of S. A. Neff, Jr., writes Elisabeth Agro
of three inseparable and integral elements: being a
angler, a collector of angling books, and a piscatori
binder." In the remainder of her essay for this catalogue sh
Neff's development as a fine binder and locates him withir
historical context of artist-binders of angling literature. Nel
statement likewise focuses on binding techniques and inne
This essay, on the other hand, looks at the images that Netf
and their relationship to the books they adorn. It is concerr
fore, with iconography ("picture writing"), angling writing
fishing for trout, the center link in Agro's tripartite chain.
In his binder's statement, Neff observes that he has an "t
sense, a keenly honed hand-to-eye coordination, a sense of
and patience" along with a well-developed "sense of histoi
are precisely the qualities one associates with fly fishing. Ti
of the beautifully streamlined and colored trout in pure flo
waters, by means most graceful and refined, is built on aes
values. Moreover, it is a pursuit rich in history’. The traditio
catching fish on a hook decorated with bits of feather and f
ancient (Figure 12), as is the practice of writing about it. As
the third century, we find an unequivocal description of fly
Claudius /Elianus’s De Animalium Nalura: "The fishermen i
wool around their hooks and fasten to the wool two feathe
grow under a cock's wattle and which are the colour of dar
After TElianus, no true angling literature is to be found unti
publication of The Treatyse of Fysshynge wyth an Angle (publi

�re followed by the Americans
&gt;37 respectively. Although these
were commercial in nature. In the
tobert Riviere &amp; Son and Sangorski &amp;
duced magnificent bindings, but
glers. Neff has followed in the
ngs, and Phair by incorporating
■ "environments.''
can be placed in a special category of
gling books who execute fine
ions. The depth of his knowledge of
i book in his library’—along with his
ity of his work to a high level. Each
edge; each design is unique and
ik. His pictorial bindings are exceplovative. S. A. Neff. Jr., guides the
the history of angling for trout. His
zinating and special world.

ANGLING BOUND
The Bindings of S. A. Neff, Jr.
Stanley I Grand

Wilkes University

he "essence" of S. A. Neff, Jr., writes Elisabeth Agro, "consists
of three inseparable and integral elements: being a devout
angler, a collector of angling books, and a piscatorial fine
binder." In the remainder of her essay for this catalogue she traces
Neff's development as a fine binder and locates him within the
historical context of artist-binders of angling literature. Neff's own
statement likewise focuses on binding techniques and innovations.
This essay, on the other hand, looks at the images that Neff has created
and their relationship to the books they adorn. It is concerned, there­
fore. with iconography ("picture writing"), angling writing, and fly
fishing for trout, the center link in Agro's tripartite chain.
In his binder's statement, Neff observes that he has an "aesthetic
sense, a keenly honed hand-to-eye coordination, a sense of proportion,
and patience" along with a well-developed "sense of history." These
are precisely the qualities one associates with fly fishing. The pursuit
of the beautifully streamlined and colored trout in pure flowing
waters, by means most graceful and refined, is built on aesthetic
values. Moreover, it is a pursuit rich in history. The tradition of
catching fish cn a hook decorated with bits of feather and fur is
ancient (Figure 12), as is the practice of writing about it. As early as
the third century we find an unequivocal description of fly fishing in
Claudius /Elianus's De Animalium Natura: "The fishermen wind red
wool around their hooks and fasten to the wool two feathers that
grow under a cock's wattle and which are the colour of dark wax."1
After /Elianus, no true angling literature is to be found until the
publication of The Treatyse ofFysshynge anyth an Angle (published in

1496 but written some seventy-five years earlier), which most attribute
to Dame Juliana Berners. Its importance, as John McDonald notes, is
that since it "has no known antecedent in fishing history and asserts
for the first time distinctive sporting attitudes toward fishing, it serves
as the point of origin of modem angling."2 Earlier writings on fishing
had treated the subject as a profession or occupation rather than a
sport. More than simply a collection of recipes and tactics, "what is
noteworthy is that Dame Juliana sets the cheerful and pious tone
which is so characteristic of English books on angling."’ The 1496
printing of Dame Juliana's treatise included a woodcut famous in
angling circles, a copy of which Neff has inlaid on the cover of the
Catalogue of the Library of Thomas Westwood, Esq. (Figure 13). Here we
see a fifteenth-century angler, who, to judge from his costume, is a
member of the merchant class—a gentleman but not an aristocrat.
Bending, he reaches out toward the taut line while simultaneously
lifting a fish from the stream. He wields a two-piece rod to which is
attached a tapered horsehair line (made by twisting together hairs
from the tail of a white horse) and a cork float or bobber. The fish
dangling from the end of his line is about to be swung ashore, des­
tined to join two others swimming in a short wooden barrel. If our
angler has followed Dame Juliana's advice, the lower section of his
rod or "rodde" is made of hazel, willow, or aspen; and the flexible tip
section, a yard in length, of blackthorn, crabtree, medlar, or juniper.
During the century and a half between the publication of Dame
Juliana's Treatyse and the first edition of Izaac Walton's The Coinpleat
Angler (1653), only a handful of new angling books appeared. One of
11

�►

these, The Arte of Angling (1577), author unknown, was familiar to
Walton, who "borrowed" numerous sections without attribution or
credit. Having gone through five editions in Walton's lifetime and well
over four hundred to date, The Coinpleat Angler is not only one of the
most influential books in angling literature but also one of the most
widely published books in the English language (Figures 14, 32, &amp; 33).
Keeping track of all the editions has become a cottage industry: in the
nineteenth century, Thomas Westwood, the piscatorial bibliophile­
collector mentioned above, along with Thomas Satchell, published a
bibliography entitled The Chronicle of the Coinpleat Angler (1864), which
was followed, most notably, by Peter Oliver's A Nero Chronicle of the
Coinpleat Angler (1936), Bernard S. Home's The Complete Angler 1653-1967
(1970), and Rodolphe L. Coigney's Izaak Walton: A New Bibliography
(1970),
1653-1987 (1989, Figures 23-28).
Until the present century, the appeal of Walton's Angler has re­
mained relatively constant—excepting only a period of obscuration
between the publication of the fifth edition and his rediscovery by
Moses Browne—because, as Charles Lamb observed in 1796, "It
breathes the very spirit of innocence, purity and simplicity of heart....
it would sweeten a man's temper at any time to read it."4 Written in
the form of a discourse between Piscator, Venator [Viator or "Way­
farer" in the first edition; Venator in all subsequent editions], and
Auceps, the Angler is part of a pastoral literary tradition that includes
Theocritus's Idylls, Virgil's Eclogues, and in angling literature, John
Dennys's Secrets ofAngling (1613). The Angler begins with a chance
encounter of three sportsmen who commence a friendly exchange on the
relative merits of their respective pastimes (fishing, hunting, falconry).
Following a medieval formula (utilized by Dame Juliana as well) of
argument followed by instruction, a conversion occurs in the course of
their discussions when Venator requests instruction in the art of angling
and Piscator agrees to be his Master. The Angler's charm is enhanced
by a liberal sprinkling of poems, songs, ditties, and rhymes amid an
exposition on the characteristics of a wide variety of fish, their habits
and preferences, and tecliniques for ensuring their capture.
Walton lived through a period of civil unrest, an interregnum when
Cromwell headed England. A Royalist, Walton found a respite from

12 • The Collector as Bookbinder

the political divisiveness of the time in pastoral pursuits. The most
famous of his pastoral retreats is Piscatoribus sacrum, a fishing house
built by his friend Charles Cotton in 1674 along the banks of the River
Dove in Derbyshire, which Neff represents on the inside panels of the
outer box containing Coigney's Walton (Figure 24). Cotton memorialized
his friendship with Walton by linking together their initials to form a
cypher (Figures 14 &amp; 23), which he had carved above the fishing house
entrance. This cypher also appears at the beginning of Part Two ot the
fifth edition of the Angler (1676) in which Cotton's own contribution, a
supplemental manual entitled Being Instructions How to Angle in Trout
or Grayling in a Clear Stream, appeared for the first time. Unlike Walton,
Cotton concentrated on two fish known for their willingness to take a
fly; he is consequently known as the "father of fly fishing." 1 he "mother
of fly fishing," of course, is Dame Juliana, whose classic patterns for a
dozen artificial flies reigned supreme for two centuries.
On the back doublure of the binding for Coigney's Bibliography
(Figure 27), Neff depicts a seventeenth-century angler catching a carp,
a much maligned fish today, but one that Walton called the "queen of
rivers."’ Reflecting Walton's observation that one must have "a very
large measure of patience ... to fish for a river Carp," Neff has thought­
fully provided his angler with a three-legged stool." Ihe seventeenth­
century angler holds a rod not much changed from the time of Dame
Juliana. The absence of a reel is expected since they were reserved
primarily for salmon fishing (a fish that Walton claims, erroneously,
will "not usually [bite] at a fly, but more usually at a worm").' Walton
does note, however, that salmon fishers use a rod and reel combination.
a ring of wire on the top of their rod, through which the line may run
to as great a length as is needful, when he [the fish] is hooked. And to
that end, some use a wheel about the middle of their rod, or near their

hand."’
In the century after the death of Walton, the reel became an increas­
ingly common sight on British streams. Along with other technical
innovations, there was a great advance in, and disbursement of,
piscatorial knowledge. However, as Major John W. Hills wrote in A
History of Fly Fishingfor Trout (1921), "When we leave them [Walton
and the other seventeenth-century' writers] we leave the reign of the

book, and come lo th it ot the manual
typical example or ar, . .ghtei r.lh-century tr-ioi ■&gt;! i i
noteworthy exception is Cl'.irk &lt; Bowik-■:'I ■■
19-20). I bis volume, which first appeared in 1747 und
Charles's father Richard, went through numerous edit
sions, and revisions. Bowlki r is remembered tor hi;- di
willingness to challenge received authorities (Berners,
and original flv drvs-.ings based on his knowledge of ent,
spirit ot the Enlightenment, Bowlker championed closi
and scientific method over the existing, authoritative,.
classical paradigm. By the end of the eighteenth if-ntui
influence was preeminent: .is Arnold Gingriih &lt;n i
Cotton and Ronalds [see below], and the dawn of an e
approach. Bowlker is the one main landmark."
The nineteenth century v.itne- .ed not only a great V
also an outpouring of titles devoted to angling, ini ludi
British Angler (Figure 31). Combined with the contribu
centuries, these and countless other books established
as the undisputed font of da sic angling literature, loh
has summarized the century's great piscatorial achieve
were explored and promulgated in angling books as fc
work of the nineteenth century was in the creation of e
the decisive shift to upstream fishing, and the inventio
which together formed the greatest revolution in flv-fi
since the sport has been known.",T In this conne :tion, t
innovations from the second half of the nineteenth ten
of mention: floating fly lines of oiled silk and FI. S. Hal
fine-wire hooks with eyes (previously all hooks were- "
and snelled). Austin Francis views these developmentlarger societal change when he argues in Catskill Risers
American Ely Fishing (Figures 15-18) that "Fly fishing ii
England, grew out of the Industrial Revolution. And a
industrialization trailed England'sby a good half centi
coming of age as anglers." In the decades after the Civil War, the effects of indu
immigration, and urbanization profoundly defined lhe

�&gt;f the time in pastoral pursuits. The most
■eats is Piscatoribus sacrum, a fishing house
Cotton in 1674 along the banks of the River
i Neff represents on the inside panels of the
ey's Walton (Figure 24). Cotton memorialized
i by linking together their initials to form a
vhich he had carved above the fishing house
appears at the beginning of Part Two of the
1676) in which Cotton's own contribution, a
tied Being Instructions How to Angle for Trout
appeared for the first time. Unlike Walton,
■o fish known for their willingness to take a
m as the "father of fly fishing." The "mother
; Dame Juliana, whose classic patterns for a
d supreme for two centuries.
the binding for Coigney's Bibliography
seventeenth-century’ angler catching a carp,
v, but one that Walton called the "queen of
s observation that one must have "a very'
. to fish for a river Carp," Neff has thought'ith a three-legged stool.6 The seventeenthnot much changed from the time of Dame
el is expected since they were reserved
g (a fish that Walton claims, erroneously,
fly, but more usually at a worm").' Walton
non fishers use a rod and reel combination:
f their rod, through which the line may' run
edful, when he [the fish] is hooked. And to
about the middle of their rod, or near their
eath of Walton, the reel became an increas:ish streams. Along with other technical
eat advance in, and disbursement of,
vever, as Major John W. Hills wrote in A
nt (1921), "When we leave them [Walton
century writers] we leave the reign of the

book, and come to that of the manual."’ The Gentleman Angler is a
typical example of an eighteenth-century manual (Figures 21-22). A
noteworthy exception is Charles Bowlker's The Art of Angling (Figures
19-20). This volume, which first appeared in 1747 under the name of
Charles's father Richard, went through numerous editions, expan­
sions, and revisions. Bowlker is remembered for his direct approach,
willingness to challenge received authorities (Berners, Cotton, et al.),
and original fly dressings based on his knowledge of entomology. In the
spirit of the Enlightenment, Bowlker championed close observation
and scientific method over the existing, authoritative, and essentially
classical paradigm. By the end of the eighteenth century, Bowlker's
influence was preeminent: as Arnold Gingrich observes "Between
Cotton and Ronalds [see below], and the dawn of an entomological
approach, Bowlker is the one main landmark."10
The nineteenth century witnessed not only a great Walton vogue but
also an outpouring of titles devoted to angling, including The Improved
British Angler (Figure 31). Combined with the contributions of earlier
centuries, these and countless other books established the British Isles
as the undisputed font of classic angling literature. John McDonald
has summarized the century's great piscatorial achievements, which
were explored and promulgated in angling books as follows: "The real
work of the nineteenth century was in the creation of entomologies,
the decisive shift to upstream fishing, and the invention of the dry fly,
which together formed the greatest revolution in fly-fishing history
since the sport has been known."11 In this connection, two other
innovations from the second half of the nineteenth century are worthy
of mention: floating fly lines of oiled silk and H. S. Hall's invention of
fine-wire hooks with eyes (previously all hooks were "blind," heavy,
and snelled). Austin Francis views these developments as part of a
larger societal change when he argues in Catskill Rivers: Birthplace of
American Fly Fishing (Figures 15-18) that "Fly fishing in America, as in
England, grew out of the Industrial Revolution. And as American
industrialization trailed England's by a good half century, so did our
coming of age as anglers."12
In the decades after the Civil War, the effects of industrialization,
immigration, and urbanization profoundly defined the development

of American fly fishing. As the great eastern cities, Boston, New York,
and Philadelphia grew, railroad arteries spread out, linking these
centers to the rest of the country and opening up new areas for
commerce and recreation. By 1851, the Erie Railroad had already made
the Delaware River a relatively easy destination. Twenty-one vears
later, in 1872, the Ulster &amp; Delaware and Ontario &amp; Western rail lines
each inaugurated rail service to the Catskills. Urban sportsmen no
longer had to endure long, brutal, and unpleasant journeys by horse
and stage to reach these pristine destinations. Such was the impact of
the transportation revolution that by the end of the century great
stretches of the Catskills were owned by the various captains of
industry, their sporting sons, and fishing clubs like Salmo Fontinalis,
established in 1873. Within a dozen years or so after the opening of the
Catskills to "sports," as these fishermen were called, the fishery had
declined precipitously due to a combination of factors including
overharvesting of the native, eager brook trout (Salvelinus fontinalis is
actually a char, not a trout) and the diminution of habitat caused in
part by logging which, among other things, raised water tempera­
tures, contributed to greater fluctuations in water levels, and added to
pollution (Figure 37). Fish managers responded by introducing two
new species to the Catskill streams: the brown trout (Salmo trutta), a
European import often called the German brown, and the rainbow
(Oncorhynchus mykiss, formerly Salmo gairdneri), from California
(Figures 9 &amp; 11). Neff commemorates the successful establishment of
the European transplant and the decline of the brook trout on the box
cover of Catskill Rivers (Figure 15). On the binding itself, he represents
three Catskill rivers by means of undulating on-lays, flowing in
tandem (Figure 16) (of the famous Catskill waters, three are rivers—
the Beaverkill [Figures 17 &amp; 18], Neversink, and Delaware—and three
are creeks—the Willowemoc, Esopus, and Schoharie).
The brown trout's successful introduction in the Catskills, and
subsequently throughout the American continent, was due in part to
its willingness to take a floating or dry fly (Figure 47) and its innate
adaptability’ to a variety of waters. Prior to the nineteenth centurv,
artificial flies were, with few exceptions, fished wet, that is, below the
surface of the water. Animated by the current or the angler, most wet

The Piscatorial Bindings of S. A Neff. Jr.

•

13

�flies, such as the Childers salmon fly (Figure 35), act as attractors or
lures. Anglers, however, had long observed that various insects on
which trout fed spent a portion of their brief, ephemeral lives on top

of the water. As knowledge of the various insects became more
systematic and widespread, fostered by influential studies such as
Alfred Ronalds's The Fly-Fisher's Entomology (1836), anglers in the
British Isles began to develop dry flies specifically tied to correspond
with, and imitate, particular stages in the life cycle of the mayfly. (As a

general rule, subject to the usual qualifications, of all the various
insects found on trout streams—caddis flies [Figure 17] which are called
sedge flies in England [Figure 24], stoneflies, midges, terrestrials like
ants or grasshoppers, et cetera—the mayfly is the most important.)
Comprising approximately five hundred species, the mayfly is a
complex, varied, and adaptable creature belonging to the order of
Ephemeroptera. Like the butterfly or moth, the mayfly undergoes a
series of striking metamorphoses during its life. After hatching from
their eggs, most mayfly nymphs spend a year living and growing on
the bottom of a stream. Depending on the type of water—moving or
still, rocky or silty—the different species have developed specialized
body types. Although all mayfly nymphs have heads; wing pads at
the thorax, abdomen, and gills; legs; and tails (either tw'o or three
part), the proportions of these components vary' depending on habitat.
Neff has carefully observed and rendered these differences on the
covers (Western limestone nymphs on the front and Catskill nymphs
on the back) of his manuscript from The Masters on the Nymph (Figure 10).
At the proper time, the nymph leaves its underwater home and drifts

k

or swims upward to the surface of the water where it shucks its
ny'mphal shell. (A few species crawl onto rocks for this transforma­
tion.) Now called a dun (subimago), the newly emerged mayfly drifts
dowmstream helplessly while its upright w’ings dry. In this vulnerable
stage the dun provides a ready meal for rising trout and the inspira­
tion for the dry fly. Figure 47 shows a brown trout in an Irish stream
about to take a green drake: the upwinged construction identifies the
fly as a dun imitator (Ephemera danica, the green drake found in Ireland,
differs somewhat from the North American green drake, Ephemera
guttulata [Figure 18]). Other prominent parts include the head, body,

14 • The Collector as Bookbinder

legs (simulated by hackle), and the tail. Neff clearly shows how
surface tension keeps the fly afloat. Once its w ings dry, the dun tto
a nearby tree or other resting spot, where it undergoes its final meta­
morphosis. Now known as a spinner (imago), the mayfly mates.
its
brief life ends, the female deposits her eggs back into the stream, and
the cycle begins anew. (Since classical times, the Ephemeroptera—from
the Greek meaning "over in a day"—have been a symbol of life and its
stations, a conceit Neff revives in his boxes for the angling correspon­
dence of S. A. Neff, Jr., and J. S. Hewitson [Figures 41-44]). The
spinners, their wings now down and transparent, fall back upon the
water and again provide the hungry trout a meal. 1 he development of
imitative dry flies, therefore, required an understanding of the life
cycle of the mayfly, with an emphasis on the important postnymphal

stages.
The insights of Ronalds were pivotal to the development of the
floating fly. Others expanded on this knowledge; and Frederic M.
Halford in particular, the author of Floating Flics and How Io Dress Them
(1886), was to have a tremendous impact on American fly fishing.

Since the brown trout was nonindigenous, American anglers quite
naturally turned to European sources for information on its habits.

Here again England provided the lead; but the ecology of American
streams was and is rather different from that of streams in the British
Isles. Interestingly enough, Izaak Walton had recognized the need to
match artificials and naturals: "there are in Wales, and other countries,
peculiar flies, proper to the particular place or country; and doubtless,
unless a man makes a fly' to counterfeit that very fly in that place, he i
like to lose his labour, or much of it."' In the Catskills, Theodore
Gordon understood this; as Francis points out, "the thing that sets
Gordon apart from the other early American dry-fly enthusiasts is the
fact that he scrutinized English dry' flies and dry-fly tactics and found
them unsuited to American trout streams."" Cordon not only knew

Halford s books, he also corresponded with him. (Neff's angling
correspondence, then, should be viewed as referencing and continuing
a well-established tradition.) Gordon's initiatives were continued by
others, including Preston Jennings, whose landmark A Book of Trout

Flies (1935) proposed new mayfly patterns based on his in-stream

studio-of the iqi itn ;j
■; undi: the . r.-k
states that Jennings ' -lands in the -imv n tot&gt;■ «i-—h
angling a- Ronald . do. , lo British; ea&lt;_r&gt; &lt;&gt;• them w
think ot serving as a link between angling and ent.
first to approach the role propt riv, and Jo it right
most appropriate th it Sett has included actual file
the container tor I rancis'sGtl-LL Ki r .
In addition to Its willingness to take the dn tlv.
unlike the brook trout- has proven retnarkabli ad
types of water. Browns are nov. found in the truest
Catskills (I tgure 8), the limestoners of South Ccntr
(Figures ft &amp; 7) and the spring creel s ot the West if
Vincent Marinaro In the Ring of the Ri*c (Figure 7);
synopsis of the differences among these waters 1 r
stream originates in elevated terrain when surfaci
melting snow trickles downhill and merges with o
brooks, streams, and finally rivers. Water flow isei
with the greatest volume occurring most often dur
year. During the summer, the flow declines, and th
ture tends to increase. With their rocky bottoms sc
and vegetation bv spring Hoods anil winter ice jan
generally much less fertile than limestoners. Limes
hand, are meadow streams, flowing through areas
vast, primordial seas. Unlike the freestoners, whos
inorganic, the limestone streams originate in bedrc
skeletal remains of the microorganisms that once ii
gone ocean-.. Being both porous and easily dissolvi
action, limestone makes an ideal aquifer, and the rr
springs from these ancient underground reservoir'
significant that the flow from these underground constant, in terms of both \ olume and temperature
the limestoner does not undergo the cyclical varict
stoner. Perhaps even more important, these aikalin
calcium carbonate, support a wide variety of aqua!
streams are less subject to the cleansing effect- of fl
on their bottoms to provide anchorage for wateren

�tail. Neff clearly shows how
Once its wings dry, the dun flies to
■vhere it undergoes its final meta;r (imago), the mayfly mates. As its
ter eggs back into tire stream, and
times, the Ephemeroptera—from
—have been a symbol of life and its
s boxes for the angling corresponritson [Figures 41-44]). The
d transparent, fall back upon the
trout a meal. The development of
td an understanding of the life
is on the important postnymphal

ital to the development of the
s knowledge; and Frederic M.
Floating Flies and How to Dress Them
ipact on American fly fishing,
enous, American anglers quite
is for information on its habits,
ad; but the ecology of American
Tom that of streams in the British
alton had recognized the need to
a are in Wales, and other countries,
ir place or country; and doubtless,
feit that very' fly in that place, he is
In the Catskills, Theodore
points out, "the thing that sets
American dry-fly enthusiasts is the
flies and dry-fly tactics and found
earns."1'' Gordon not only knew
ed with him. (Neff's angling
wed as referencing and continuing
n's initiatives were continued by
whose landmark A Book of Trout
atterns based on his in-stream

studies of the aquatic insect life found in the Catskill rivers. Gingrich
Gingrich
states that Jennings "stands in the same relationship to American
angling as Ronalds does to British; each of them was, if not the first to
think of serving as a link between angling and entomology, at least the
first to approach the role properly, and do it right."15 It therefore seems
most appropriate that Neff has included actual flies tied by Jennings in
the container for Francis's Catskill Rivers.
In addition to its willingness to take the dry fly, the brown trout_
unlike the brook trout—has proven remarkably adaptive to divers
types of water. Browns are now found in the freestone streams of the
Catskills (Figure 8), the limestoners of South Central Pennsylvania
(Figures 6 &amp; 7) and the spring creeks of the West (Figures 8 &amp; 9).
Vincent Marinaro bi the Ring of the Rise (Figure 7) provides a useful
synopsis of the differences among these waters. The typical freestone
stream originates in elevated terrain when surface water from rain or
melting snow trickles downhill and merges with other rivulets to form
brooks, streams, and finally rivers. Water flow is extremely varied,
with the greatest volume occurring most often during the spring of the
year. During the summer, the flow declines, and the water tempera­
ture tends to increase. With their rocky bottoms, scoured free of silt
and vegetation by spring floods and winter ice jams, freestoners are
generallj’ much less fertile than limestoners. Limestoners, on the other
hand, are meadow streams, flowing through areas once covered by
vast, primordial seas. Unlike the freestoners, whose rocks tend to be
inorganic, the limestone streams originate in bedrock composed of the
skeletal remains of the microorganisms that once inhabited the longgone oceans. Being both porous and easily dissolved by chemical
action, limestone makes an ideal aquifer, and the modem limestoner
springs from these ancient underground reservoirs of water. It is
significant that the flow from these underground sources is relatively
constant, in terms of both volume and temperature, which means that
the limestoner does not undergo the cyclical variations of the freestoner. Perhaps even more important, these alkaline waters, rich in
calcium carbonate, support a wide variety of aquatic life. Since these
streams are less subject to the cleansing effects of flooding, silt remains
on their bottoms to provide anchorage for watercress and other

aquatic plants, which in turn add essential oxygen to the water and
host whole colonies of tiny snails and bugs—the basic building blocks
of the food chain. (Western spring creeks, for the most part, are
comparable to the limestoners.) From an ecological standpoint, this
means that more and bigger trout are likely to be found in fertile
waters (although big fish are also found in large freestone waters
because there is a sufficient volume, if not density, of food).
Each type of stream has different conditions; and American anglers
and angling authors have studied their own home waters closely. For
example, fish that live in fast-moving broken water such as rapids or
riffles, must decide quickly and impulsively whether to grab a passing
morsel before it is swept downstream. The famous, gin-clear, slowmoving streams of Central Pennsylvania, on the other hand, produce
wary trout who carefully inspect each offering for any sign of artifici­
ality (color, size, silhouette, or drag). Their selectivity has prompted
numerous studies including Vincent Marinaro's In the Ring of the Rise
(1976), which interprets the rise patterns of trout as a key to under­
standing their feeding habits (Figure 7). Earlier, Marinaro's studies of
the Letort and other limestoners resulted in A Modern Dry Fly Code
(1950). Although this work argued for the importance of terrestrials in
the diet of these trout and included innovative dressings for flies
based on these conclusions, Neff has chosen to represent the Ephemeralla dorothea, known to anglers as the sulpher dun, on the cover
(Figure 7). Neff's homage to Marinaro includes flies tied by the master,
slides, an audio cassette, and letters—all housed in boxes along with
his seminal books.
Marinaro's influence is felt in Angling in Hibernia. When Neff first went
to Ireland in 1964, and on his return in 1966, he applied Marinaro's
experimental approach to the streams of Eire and developed new
designs for flies with which to imitate the full range of Irish aquatic
insects (Figure 47). Memories of Ireland appear in the abstract land­
scapes of mountains, meadows, rivers, and lakes that adorn both
covers of The Angler's Calendar (Figure 14). More literally, we are
transported back three decades by the objects preserved in a Cornelllike life box: Mucilin, the old-reliable, pre-silicon floatant; a Hardv
Lightweight reel on a simple two-ring reel seat from a cane rod; a

The Piscatorial Bindings ofS. .4. Neff, Jr. • 15

�finger vise, small hackle pliers, scissors, hooks, and silk for tying flies
streamside; a small glass to identify insects; photographs and pam­
phlets; an amadou for drying flies; a spool of leader material; and a

combination scale and measuring tape that promises, like some
Baroque allegory, the triumph of truth over falsehood (Figure 49).
In Neff's time, trout fishing with the fly has undergone dramatic
changes. Once mostly the sport of an elite, often Anglophile, group of
men—for whom fly' fishing was an emblem of class—who fished with
silk, gut, and Tonkin cane, the sport has gradually found more and

more adherents. In the 1940s, after World War II, nylon leaders re­
placed gut, which required soaking prior to use. Next, modern float­
ing lines banished silk, with its confusing designations and high

maintenance (C. F. Orvis invented the ventilated reel in the late
nineteenth century to facilitate the drying of silk lines [Figure 40,
lower center]). Finally, fiberglass at first, and now graphite rods have
triumphed over hand-made, split-bamboo wands (except in the eyes
of a small band of dedicated partisans). With technological advances,
increased environmental awareness, and a wealth of new angling
titles, fly fishing has rebounded from its nadir in the early 1950s when
it appeared that spin-fishing, a postwar French import that exploited
the properties of newly available nylon, would relegate it to history.
Yet along with its democratization, many of the sport's traditions
have been lost, or are of little interest, to its new adherents. One need
only listen to an old-time fly tier talk of water-bird, forest-bird, and
other feathers; water-shedding muskrat-beaver-seal furs, or hair from
the woodland deer, the meadow hare, the wily fox to understand a
great, interconnected cycle that comes together in the flash of a rise or
the underwater wink, in Skues's immortal image, of the trout. Today,
artificial materials increasingly predominate.
Neff's entire endeavor is an homage to tradition and values, craft
and sport; it is a studied, but natural, anachronism. In both his bind­
ings and his angling, he stresses continuity and innovation (Figures 26
&amp; 28). He does not disdain his own time, but he moves slowly and
reflectively before embracing change. His moral compass does not
swing freely with the relativism of the postmodern age but remains

16 • The Collector as Bookbinder

fixed. He traverses an ordered landscape where precedent and learn­
ing are the major features. In the face of the cheap, the arriviste, the
tawdry, and mass culture, he flaunts his love of the handmade, the
beautiful, the unique, and, of course, the trout. Like the cloistered
scribes who kept alive great books during the centuries after the fall of
Rome, Neff is at heart a preservationist. He is the keeper of the tan­
gible remains of friendship—the letters—for which he constructs
elaborate, modern reliquaries or treasuries. Like a carefully considered
garden, fly fishing is a magnificent obsession in which civilization and

art elevate and transform the mundane into a conceit. It is not a
simulacrum; there is really nothing else like it.

NOTES
1. Quoted in Charles Jardine, The Classic Guide to Fly-Fishing for Trout

(New York: Random House, 1991): 10.
2. John McDonald, The Origins of Angling, 1963 (reprinted New York:

Lyons &amp; Burford, 1997): 6.
3. Margaret Bottrall, Introduction in Izaak Walton, The Compleat Angler,
5th ed. 1676 (reprinted London: Dent, Everyman's Library, 1906,1970): viii.

4. Quoted in Bottrall, Introduction, p. v.
5. Izaak Walton, The Compleat Angler, 5th ed. 1676 (reprinted London:
Dent, Everyman's Library, 1906,1970): 132.
6. Walton, Cornpleat Angler, p. 137.
7. Ibid., p. 117.
8. Ibid. According to McDonald, the first mention of the reel occurs in

Thomas Barker's The Art of Angling (1651) (Origins, p. 23).
9. Quoted in Arnold Gingrich, The Fishing in Print: A Guided Tour Throng':
Five Centuries of Angling Literature (New York: Winchester Press, 1974): 60

10. Ibid., p. 73.
11. McDonald, Origins, p. 106.
12. Austin Francis, Catskill Rivers: Birthplace of American Fly Fishing, HN
(reprinted New York: Lyons &amp; Burford, 1996): 22.
13. Walton, Compleat Angler, p. 8.
14. Francis, Catskill Rivers, p. 41.
15. Gingrich, Fishing in Print, p. 277.

GLOSSARY

Adhesives Poly vinyl acetate (PVA) is a flexible glue romi
adhering cloth and paper to binder s board Wheat st
for adhering leather to binder's board or to leather.
Ascona tool A small brass tool with a wooden handle u«
templates for blind-tooling
Basswood A soft, finely grained wood that is easily rant
Binder's board An extremely dense paper board (availab
nesses) used for cover boards and boxes.
Binding (full) 1 he entire book cover is of goatskin or oth
Binding (half) 1 he spine and part of the sides and either
edge are covered with goatskin; the remainder is covi
decorated paper.
Binding (quarter) The spine and part of the sides are cov
the remainder is covered with cloth or decorated pap
Bound, case A binding technique used primarily lor clotl
block is sewn on linen tapes and the cover is made se
and last sheets (papers or pages) of the text block are
cover bv gluing or pasting.
Bound by hand A technique used primarily for leather b
block is sewn on linen tapes or cords which are then 1
binder’s board to form an integral unit and then cove
Bristol board A stiff acid-free paper made m sec eral thicl
tooling templates, bases for raised on-lays, and other
Chemise folder A folder made with Bristol board and co
Doublure Usually a decorative panel on the inside of the
either paper or leather.
Drop-back box A container made for storing rare or fraci
strutted of cloth or leather over binder’s board
Edge T he top edge is the top of the text block: the fore-ed
of the text block. A deckle-edge is an uneven edge usi
handmade paper; it may be left uncut or trimmed. Tri
be treated with graphite or gold leaf and polished.
End bands Hand embroidered silk bands or goat-4 in bar
ends of the spine of the text block.
End papers The first and last few leaves (pages; of the te1
mav be plain, colored, or decorated.

�i landscape where precedent and leamthe face of the cheap, the arriviste, the
flaunts his love of the handmade, the
course, tire trout. Like the cloistered
ooks during the centuries after the fall of
-vationist. He is the keeper of the tanhe letters—for which he constructs
or treasuries. Like a carefully considered
icent obsession in which civilization and
mundane into a conceit. It is not a

thing else like it.

The Classic Guide to Fly-Fishing for Trout
): 10.
s of Angling, 1963 (reprinted New Y'ork:

don in Izaak Walton, The Coinpleat Angler,
lent, Everyman's Library', 1906, 1970): viii.
:tion, p. v.
Angler, 5th ed. 1676 (reprinted London:
970): 132.
137.

Id, the first mention of the reel occurs in
ig (1651) (Origins, p. 23).
The Fishing in Print: A Guided Tour Through
(New York: Winchester Press, 1974): 60.

rs: Birthplace of American Fly Fishing, 1983
rford, 1996): 22.
3.
277.

GLOSSARY

Adhesives Polyvinyl acetate (PVA) is a flexible glue commonly used for
adhering cloth and paper to binder's board. Wheat starch paste is used
for adhering leather to binder's board or to leather.
Ascona tool A small brass tool with a wooden handle used with stiff paper
templates for blind-tooling.
Basswood A soft, finely grained wood that is easily carved.
Binder's board An extremely dense paper board (available in six thick­
nesses) used for cover boards and boxes.
Binding (full) The entire book cover is of goatskin or other material.
Binding (half) The spine and part of the sides and either the corners or foreedge are covered with goatskin; the remainder is covered with cloth or
decorated paper.
Binding (quarter) The spine and part of the sides are covered with goatskin;
the remainder is covered with cloth or decorated paper.
Bound, case A binding technique used primarily for cloth covers. The text
block is sewn on linen tapes and the cover is made separately. The first
and last sheets (papers or pages) of the text block are attached to the
cover by gluing or pasting.
Bound by hand A technique used primarily for leather bindings. The text
block is sewn on linen tapes or cords which are then laced into the
binder's board to form an integral unit and then covered with goatskin.
Bristol board A stiff acid-free paper made in several thicknesses; used for
tooling templates, bases for raised on-lays, and other applications.
Chemise folder A folder made with Bristol board and covered with cloth.
Doublure Usually' a decorative panel on the inside of the cover; it can be
either paper or leather.
Drop-back box A container made for storing rare or fragile books; con­
structed of cloth or leather over binder's board.
Edge The top edge is the top of the text block; the fore-edge is the front edge
of the text block. A deckle-edge is an uneven edge usually found on
handmade paper; it may' be left uncut or trimmed. Trimmed edges may
be treated with graphite or gold leaf and polished.
End bands Hand embroidered silk bands or goatskin bands attached to the
ends of the spine of the text block.
End papers The first and last few leaves (pages) of the text; the first and last
may be plain, colored, or decorated.

Goatskin Chagrin—a hand-finished fine grain leather processed in France
using South African goatskin; Chieftain—an even, large grain leather
processed in Scotland using goatskin from Botswana; Oasis—medium
grain leather processed in England using Nigerian goatskin.
Goatskin, in-lays Shapes of goatskin pasted into position on the binding
where their corresponding shapes have been removed (so the in-lays are
flush with the surface of the binding); linear in-lays are very thin strips
of goatskin adhered into blind tooled lines.
Goatskin, flat on-lays Thinly pared shapes of goatskin pasted onto the binding.
Goatskin, raised on-lays Thinly pared goatskin glued onto shapes of fourply' Bristol board, turned-in, and glued onto the binding.
Italian cloth A finely woven book cloth with a paper backing.
Japanese dyed paper A paper made in Japan using dyed fibers; available in
a multiplicity' of colors.
Japanese gilt paper A very thin paper with hand-laminated gold-colored
foil; also known as Tea chest paper.
Marbled paper Paper that has been colored or stained by hand with variegated patterns to resemble marble.
Panel design A vertical design of rectangles and borders reminiscent of binding
designs commonly used in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
Polished graphite A gray metallic covering applied to the edges of the text
block and brought to a high sheen bv hand polishing.
Stamping A method of impressing an image into goatskin using a press that
will heat a die to the necessary temperature; this plain impression is
known as blind-stamping; when gold foil is used (a second time) to
create an impression, it is known as gilt-stamping.
Stamping die A metal block with a design (in relief) used for creating a blind
or gilt impression in goatskin or other materials.
Text-block All the leaves (pages) sewn on linen tapes or cords.
Tooling A method of impressing a small image or line into goatskin using a
hand tool or wheel; the plain image is known as blind-tooling; when
gold foil or leaf is used, it is known as gilt-tooling.
Tooling templates Shapes cut from Bristol board (to the binder's design) are
used as guides with the Ascona tool.
Vellum, calf Calf-skin treated with lime to produce a strong, cream-colored
material for bindings.

17

�1 S. A. Neff, Jr., et al. A Book of Small Flies. Arlington, Vermont, 1983.
Created in 1986.

Two drop-back boxes containing a unique four-volume set; in full calf
vellum with panels of marbled paper and raised bands; gilt-stamped
Oasis goatskin on-lays and spine label.
k

21.6 x 16.5 cm.
2 Each box contains two volumes; uniformly case-bound in full calf vellum
with panels of marbled paper and raised bands; gilt-stamped onlays and
spine labels. Vols. I and III are sewn on Oasis covered vellum strips; silk
endbands and marbled endpapers. Contents: Vol. I: text; Vol. II: actual
flies; Vol. Ill: color photographs; Vol. IV: feathers and furs for dressing
small flies.

7.5 x 6 cm. (each volume)

R

�i
1

2

�3 S. A. Neff, Jr., et al. A Book of Small Flies. Arlington, Vermont, 1983.
Created in 1986.

A drop-back box containing No. 54 of the original edition of 60 numbered
two-voiume sets; in full calf vellum with a panel design of raised vellum,
marbled paper, piscatorial devices and spine label gilt-stamped on Oasis
goatskin.

26.9/18.4 cm.

4 Box opened to show the original two-volume set bound by Gray Parrot
for the publisher and portraits of the four authors. Also contains a vellum
back cloth chemise with the manuscript for Mr. Neff's essay, the publisher's
correspondence and announcement, and associated items.

��5 Vincent C. Marinaro.
f

I A Modem Dry-Fly Code. New York, 1950.
II Hies, Letters and Photographs. Sewickley, Pennsylvania, 1973.
III "A Limestone Challenge." Sewickley, Pennsylvania, 1973.

Created in 1988-89.

Three drop-back boxes in Italian cloth with marbled paper panels and giltstamped paper spine labels. Box I contains the 1st and 2nd issues of the
1950 edition of the Code. Box II contains a drop-back box with five flies
dressed by .Mr. .Marinaro and a portrait; two chemise folders containing an
unbound suite of photographs of the author; and five of his letters. Box III
is on': of a set of two, each of which contains a tray of 35 mm. slides and
an audio cassette documentary on Marinaro; it functions horizontally and
is contained in a cloth slip-case.
I: 24.1 z 16 8 cm.; II: 30.1 x 24 cm.; Ill: 26.8 z 28.5 cm.

��7

t

6 Vincent C. Marinaro. A Modern Dry-Fly Code. New York, 1970
(new edition), and In the Ring of the Rise. New York, 1976.
Created in 1989.
A drop-back box containing two volumes; with Italian cloth back and
edges; panels of Japanese dyed and gilt papers and gilt-stamped paper
spine labels.
30 / 24 cm.

7 Both volumes are case-bound with Italian cloth back and edges with
panels of Japanese dyed and gilt papers, gilt-stamped paper spine labels,
silk endbands and color endpapers. The panels on the box portray the
Cumberland Valley in Pennsylvania; the Code shows the Letort Spring
Kun and a mayfly; th&lt;- Ring reveals a feeding brown trout in that stream.
Code: 21.5 / 13.8 cm.; Ring: 28 x 21.2 cm.

�•iSk&gt;3^CMK_4.

-,

H

I

L

if
r/

. r ^:

�8 S. A. Neff, Jr. Essay from The Masters on the Nymph. New York, 1979.
Created in 1989-90.
A drop-back box containing three volumes; with green Chieftain goatskin
back and edges with panels of Japanese dyed and gilt papers and giltstamped goatskin spine label. The back panel portrays a Catskill river, and
the front panel a Western limestone creek.

28.2x19.7 cm.

�8

�f

9 Vol. I: Text.
Green Chieftain goatskin back and edges with panels of Japanese dyed
and gilt papers, gilt-stamped goatskin spine label, silk endbands and color
endpapers. The panels show a brown trout in a Western limestone creek.

25.9 x 17.3 cm.
t

10 Vol. Ill: Manuscript and Photographs.
Green Chieftain goatskin back and edges with panels of Japanese dyed
and gilt papers, gilt-stamped goatskin spine label. Contains a cloth
chemise with typed manuscript, photographs, and publisher's correspon­
dence. The panels reveal nymphs on the bottom of a Catskill river and a
Western limestone creek.
25.9 x 17.3 cm.

�9

10

�11 Vol. IF. Flies and Materials.
Green Chieftain goatskin back and edges with panels of Japanese dyed
and gilt papers, gilt-stamped goatskin spine label. Contains a cloth folder.
The panels depict a rainbow trout in a Catskill river.

25.9x 17.3 cm.

12 Vol. Il: Cloth folder.
Actual trout flies; furs, feathers and hooks, mounted on printed plates.

�11

12

&gt; *
*

-b4 &lt;

-

�13 Catalogue of the Library of Thomas Westwood, Esq. New York, 1873, and
Charles M. Wetzel. American Fishing Books. Stone Harbor, New Jersey, 1990.

Both bound in 1990.
Left: bound in full dark red Chieftain goatskin with horizontal raised goat­
skin on-lavs of two shades, and gold leather; pictorial paper in-lay, giltstamped goatskin spine label, leather endbands and marbled endpapers.
24x17.8 cm.

Right bound in full dark red Chieftain goatskin with raised horizontal
bars, gilt-stamped facsimile of author's signature, gilt-stamped goatskin
spine label, leather endbands and marbled endpapers.
25.1 x 18.4 cm.

14 Hi Regan. The Angler's Calendar. London, 1896, and Izaak Walton and
Charles Cotton. The Complete Angler. London, 1836.
Both bound in 1991.

Left bound in full green Oasis goatskin with on-lays of various goatskins,
blind tooling, gilt-stamped goatskin spine label, leather endbands and
marbled endpapers. Panels contain shapes symbolizing Ireland's moun­
tains, meadows, rivers, and lakes.
24.6 z 18 cm.

Right: bound in full dark green Chieftain goatskin with flat and raised on­
lays of various goatskins, blind tooling, gilt-stamped goatskin spine label
silk endbands and marbled endpapers. The IWCC cypher was devised bv
Charles Cotton in 1674.

17.5x10.5 cm.

��f

15 Austin M. Francis. Catskill Rivers: Birthplace of American Fly Fishing.
New York, 1983.
Created in 1991.
A drop-back box in full dark green Chieftain goatskin with panel of
Japanese dyed and gilt papers and gilt-stamped goatskin raised on-lay spine
label. The panel depicts the trout of the Catskill rivers: the brook trout
(leaping downward) declined near the end of the nineteenth century, to be
replaced by the brown trout imported from Europe (moving upward).

40 x 24.5 cm.
16 Bound in full dark green Chieftain goatskin with title in raised on-lays of
the same leather; three on-lays of various blue goatskins, pictorial
doublures, leather endbands and color endpapers. The three flowing
shapes symbolize the major Catskill rivers.
28.5 z 21.5 cm.

��I

J

17 Front doublure portraying the upper Beaverkill River and a caddis th
panel of Japanese dyed and gilt papers, goatskin edges and hinge.
18 Back doublure showing the East Branch of the Delaware Rix er and a
mayfly; panel of Japanese dyed and gilt papers, goatskin edges and hinge.

��19 Charles Bowlker. The Art of Angling. Birmingham, 1792, and Ludlow, 1826.
Created in 1992.

A drop-back box containing two volumes; in full brown Chieftain
goatskin with blind tooling, goatskin on-lays and gilt-stamped goatskin
spine label.

19.2 x 13 cm.
20 Uniformly bound in full brown Chieftain goatskin with blind tooling,
goatskin on-lays, gilt-stamped goatskin spine label, silk endbands and
marbled endpapers. The pattern is a twentieth-centurv version of an
eighteenth-century panel design.

17.1 X 10.8 cm.

��21 Anonymous. The Gentleman Angler. London, 1726; 3rd. ed., n.d.; 1786.
Created in 1992.
A drop-back box containing three volumes; in full dark red Chagrin
goatskin with blind tooling, goatskin on-lays and gilt-stamped goatskin
spine label.
18.5x12.2 cm.

22 Bound uniformly in dark red Chagrin goatskin with blind tooling,
goatskin on-lays, gilt-stamped goatskin spine labels, leather endbands and
marbled endpapers. The pattern is a twentieth-century version of an
eighteenth-century panel design.

1:16.2 x 9.5 cm. 2:16.4 x 9.6 cm. 3:15 x8.8 cm.

��24

f

23 Rodolphe L. Coigney. Izaak Walton: A New Bibliography 1653-1987.
New York, 1989.
Created in 1992.

A center-opening box containing an inner box with two volumes; in full
dark green Chieftain goatskin with cypher of raised on-lays of various
goatskins. The IWCC cypher has appeared in numerous editions of The
Complete Angler beginning with the 5th edition in 1676.
28.2 x 20.3 x 9.5 cm.
24 Outer box open to reveal triptych of Japanese dyed and gilt papers with
goatskin edges and hinges. The center panel is the cover of tire inner box.
The panels portray Charles Cotton's Fishing House on the River Dove,
built in 1674.

��25 Volumes I and II: uniformly bound in full red hand-finished goatskin with
blind tooling, flat goatskin on-lays, raised goatskin on-lays with giltstamped piscatorial images, gilt-stamped goatskin spine labels, pictorial
doublures. Vol. I contains the text; leather endbands with multiple color
on-lays and color endpapers. Vol. II contains a chemise with Mr. Neff's
color photographs of the River Dove and the Fishing House.
26.1 x 17.2 cm.

26 Front doublure of Vol. I: Japanese dyed and gilt papers, leather edges and
hinge. The panel depicts a seventeenth-century angler on an English river.
27 Back doublure of Vol. I: Japanese dyed and gilt papers, leather edges and
hinge. The panel shows a seventeenth-century angler catching a fish.
28 Front doublure of Vol. II: Japanese dyed and gilt papers, leather edges and
hinge, a cloth chemise is attached to the inside of the back cover. A
twentieth-century angler replaces the seventeenth-century angler on the
same river.

��►

29 Rev. Joseph Adams. Angling in Ireland. London, 1938. (A unique copy.)
Created in 1993.
A drop-back box in full green Chieftain goatskin with blind tooling and
gilt-stamped title.

23.7x15.8 cm.

30 Bound in full green Chieftain goatskin with goatskin on-lays, gilt tooling
on covers, spine and top and bottom edges, leather endbands and color
endpapers. The blind-tooled design of a flowing river on the box intro­
duces the more developed decoration on the binding.
21.8 x 13.7 cm.

��31 Robert Huish. The Improved British Angler. Derby, 1838.
Created in 1990; decorated in 1994.
Bound in full gray-blue Oasis goatskin with goatskin in-lays, gilt tooling,
gilt-stamped devices and goatskin spine label, silk endbands and marbled
endpapers. Contained in a cloth chemise with a goatskin back and a
quarter goatskin slip-case, with gilt-stamped goatskin spine labels. This is
a r.ventieth-century interpretation of an eighteenth-century panel design.

5bp-ca~e: 14.4 x 11.5 cm.; Chemise: 13.8 x 11.2 cm.; Binding: 13.6 x 10.4 cm.
f

32 Izaak Walton and Charles Cotton. The Complete Angler. London, 1797.
Created in 1994.
A drop-back box in full dark green Chieftain goatskin with linear goatskin
in-lays and gilt-stamped goatskin spine label.
20.3 / 13.3 cm.

33 Bound in full dark green Chieftain goatskin with panels of goatskin onlavs. linear goatskin in-lays, gilt tooling, gilt-stamped device and spine
label, leather endbands with on-lays, marbled endpapers and polished
graphite on top edge. This is a twentieth-century version of a seventeenth­
century panel design. The simple design on the box introduces the
developed design on the binding.
18 / 10.4 an.

�����I

37

■i

���41 The Angling Letters ofS. A. Neff, Jr. and J. S. Hewitson. 1965-1999. Sewickley,
Pennsylvania, 1997.
Created in 1996-97.
A uniform set of four drop-back boxes containing letters and photographs
from the mid-1960s to the end of the 1990s.

1960s Box: Full dark red Chagrin goatskin with a twentieth-century panel
design of concentric circles of linear goatskin in-lays, a raised goatskin onlay on each cover with linear goatskin in-lay circles and a gilt-stamped
device, and gilt-stamped raised goatskin on-lay spine label. Contains two
cloth chemise folders: one with letters written during the decade and the
other with photographs by Mr. Neff that illustrate an angling experience.
The gilt-stamped device depicting a mayfly nymph becomes a metaphor
for the relationship between the two anglers.
30.7 z 24 cm.
42 1970s Box: The gilt device becomes a mayfly dun as the relationship
develops.

30.7x24 cm.

■

��-

)•&gt;
43 1980s Box: The gilt device becomes a mayfly spinner as the anglers
mature.
30.7 z 24 cm.

44 1990s Box: The gilt device remains a mayfly spinner.
30.7 z 24 cm.

��45 S. A. Neff, Jr. Angling in Hibernia. Sewickley, Pennsylvania, 1998.
Created in 1998.
A uniform set of five volumes; in full brown Chieftain goatskin with a
Celtic device blind-tooled on each cover, gilt-tooled dots, pictorial
doublures with panels of Japanese dyed and gilt papers, on front and
back of Vol. I and front only on other volumes.
I

Vol. I; Text.
Vol. II: Contains a cloth chemise with 30 photographs taken by the
author.
Vol. Ill: Fold-out container with 158 Irish flies devised and dressed by the
author.

Vol. IV: Fold-out container with the author's fly patterns and the feathers,
furs and hooks for dressing Irish flies.
Vol. V: Life-box containing the author's Irish angling memorabilia. A
pull-out drawer contains Irish angling pamphlets and correspondence.

�■

\

J
45

I
1 §

I'
k

F

»

s
!

I !•

11
5’

i
i

-

§

ili

co

3
co

3-

S’

t

a

i

S’

:i’

I'I
■

■

�46 Vol. Ill: Irish trout flies.
30.8 x 21 cm.

47 Vol. Ill: Panel of Japanese dyed and gilt papers and fold-out container
with 158 Irish trout flies. The panel depicts an Irish brown trout about to
rise to the author's Green Drake fly.

�46

47

1 -» »»

- A _

�■

48 Vol. V: Memento hominem.

30.8 x 21 cm.
49 Vol. V: Panel of Japanese dyed and gilt papers and life box with angling
memorabilia and tools. The panel depicts an Irish brown trout in the
landing net.

�48

49

Wir
‘^Sv:

fci

�a

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
S. A. NEFF, JR.
Resides: Sewickley, Pennsylvania
EXHIBITIONS

1986
80
Years Later [Guild of Book Workers' 80th Anniversary Exhibition]
(juried), Center for the Book, University of Iowa Museum of Art,
Iowa City, Iowa; Detroit Public Library, Detroit, Michigan; MIT
Museum, Cambridge, Massachusetts; Institute for the Book Arts,
University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa, Alabama; Folger Shakespeare

&gt;r.'

f\ ■

Massachusetts

1993
Exhibition of Design for Communications (invitational). West Virginia

Library, Washington, D. C.

University, Morgantown, W'est Virginia

1988
Bound To Learn: An Invitational Exhibit of the Book Arts,
West Virginia University, Morgantown, West Virginia

1992-1993
Fine Printers Finely Bound Too [Guild of Book Workers' 86th Anniversary
Exhibition] (juried), Explore Print!, San Francisco, California; Scripps
College, Claremont, California; Dallas Public Library, Dallas, Texas;
Minnesota Center for the Book Arts, Minneapolis, Minnesota; The
University of Michigan Library, Ann Arbor. Michigan; Newberry Library,
Chicago, Illinois; Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pennsylvania

1989

,'L ■

1992
10th Anniversary Exhibition of the New England Chapter of the Guild of
of Our National I k-ritage, 1Lexington,
Book Workers (juried), Museum c.

Members' Exhibition, Guild of Book Workers, New England Chapter,
Museum of Art, Rhode Island School of Design, Providence,

Rhode Island

ic?
II.' ■

1990
The Collector As Bookbinder: The Piscatorial Bindings ofS. A. Neff, Jr.,
Fine &amp; Rare Book Room, Hunt Library, Carnegie Mellon University,
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

1990-1991
Contemporary American Bookbinding; An Exhibition Organized by the
Grolier Club at the Invitation of Les Amis de la Reliure Originate (juried),
Bibliotheque de TArsenal, Paris, France; Bibliotheca Wittockiana,
Brussels, Belgium; The Grolier Club, New York, New York
66

ARTICLES

Robert H. Boyle. "Design: A Tier Who Binds in the Angling World,"
Sports Illustrated (January' 1991).

The bookbinder wi-h&gt; to express he. gratitude te hi
her support and patience: to Philip R. Bishup for 1&gt;: .
tion of the catalogue manuscript and ter his w ise un
friends Tom Alden, Elisabeth R. Agro, Robert!! Boy
1.. F. Boker Doyle, Richard A. I uller, Stanley I Grand, ai
Elisabeth Agro wishes to thank Tracy Mvers for a i
her essay.
The Sordoni Ail &lt; ..tilery thanks the artist tor mati
possible. In addition, the Gallery wishes to thank Su
enthusiasm; 1 lisabeth Agro lor her insightful rs iv.
(. hristopher N. Brei eth's and Robert J. Fleaman’s e&lt;;
on my essay. Nancy L. Krueger bus provided invalu.
all aspects of the exhibition.
Finally we thank the following individuals and in
will be hosting the exhibition: Nancy Kelley, Coordh
rary Exhibits, New York State Museum: James E. Kii
Cleveland Museum of Natural History. ( raig Morri
American Museum of Natural History; David Peril i
Roche ,ter Institute of Tec hnology, Can. Collection: C
Director, and Sean Sonderson, Curator, The America
Fishing.

�ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

liter of the Guild of
Iritage, Lexington,

il). West Virginia

86th Anniversary
difomia; Scripps
\ Dallas, Texas;
innesota; The
i; Newberry Library,
Pennsylvania

The bookbinder wishes to express his gratitude to his wife, Sue, for
her support and patience; to Philip R. Bishop for his critical examina­
tion of the catalogue manuscript and for his wise counsel; and to his
friends Tom Alden, Elisabeth R. Agro, Robert H. Boyle, Jeff Cornelia,
L. F. Boker Doyle, Richard A. Fuller, Stanley I Grand, and Linda Tonetti.
Elisabeth Agro wishes to thank Tracy Myers for a critical reading of
her essay.
The Sordoni Art Gallery thanks the artist for making this exhibition
possible. In addition, the Gallery wishes to thank Sue Neff for her
enthusiasm; Elisabeth Agro for her insightful essay. I appreciate
Christopher N. Breiseth's and Robert J. Heaman's editorial comments
on my essay. Nancy L. Krueger has provided invaluable assistance on
all aspects of the exhibition.
Finallj' we thank the following individuals and institutions who
will be hosting the exhibition: Nancy Kelley, Coordinator of Tempo­
rary Exhibits, New York State Museum; James E. King, Director,
Cleveland Museum of Natural History; Craig Morris, Dean of Science,
American Museum of Natural History; David Pankow, Curator,
Rochester Institute of Technology, Cary Collection; Gary Tanner,
Director, and Sean Sonderson, Curator, The American Museum of Fly
Fishing.
—SIG

Angling World/'

67

�ADVISORY COMMISSION
Bonnie C. Bedford, Ph.D.
Freddie Bittenbender
Christopher N. Breiseth, Ph.D.
Marion M. Conyngham
Virginia C. Davis, Chair
Stanley I Grand, Ph.D.
Robert J. Fleaman, Ph.D.
Marv Jane Henry
Keith A. Hunter, Esq.
J. Michael Lennon, Ph.D.
Melanie Maslow Lumia
Theo Lumia
Kenneth Marquis
Hank O'Neal
Arnold Rifkin
Charles A. Shaffer, Esq.
Susan Adams Shoemaker, Esq.
William Shull
Helen Farr Sloan
Andrew J. Sordoni, III
Sanford B. Stemlieb, M.D.
Mindi Thalenfeld
Thomas H. van Arsdale
Joel Zitofsky

EXHIBITION UNDERWRITERS
Friends of the Sordoni Art Gallery
M &amp; T Bank
Maslow Lumia Bartorillo Advertising
Mellon Bank
Pennsylvania Council on the Arts
The Piscatoribus Press
The John Sloan Memorial Foundation, Inc.
Andrew J. Sordoni, III
Wilkes University

SPONSORS
The Business Council
CBI-Creative Business Interiors
Mr. and Mrs. David C. Hall
Marquis Art and Frame
PNC Bank, NA
Panzitta Enterprises, Inc.

STAFF
Stanley I Grand, Ph.D., Director
Nancy L. Krueger, Coordinator
Earl W. Lehman, Preparator

4..

68

Gallery Attendants
Deidre Blake
Marcy Fritz
Jon Geller
Jill Klicka
Allison McGarvey

�«IBE.

?

i

�ill

S

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <collection collectionId="24">
      <elementSetContainer>
        <elementSet elementSetId="1">
          <name>Dublin Core</name>
          <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
          <elementContainer>
            <element elementId="50">
              <name>Title</name>
              <description>A name given to the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367364">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery Exhibition Programs, 1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="41">
              <name>Description</name>
              <description>An account of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367365">
                  <text>Exhibition programs created by the Sordoni Art Gallery from 1973 to the present. &#13;
&#13;
Digitized by Wilkes University Archives interns, Zachary Mendoza and Sophia Kruspha. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="39">
              <name>Creator</name>
              <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367366">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="48">
              <name>Source</name>
              <description>A related resource from which the described resource is derived</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367367">
                  <text>Wilkes University</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="45">
              <name>Publisher</name>
              <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367368">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="40">
              <name>Date</name>
              <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367369">
                  <text>1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="47">
              <name>Rights</name>
              <description>Information about rights held in and over the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367370">
                  <text>Wilkes University retains copyright of these exhibition programs. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="44">
              <name>Language</name>
              <description>A language of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367371">
                  <text>English</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="51">
              <name>Type</name>
              <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367372">
                  <text>Exhibition programs, flyers, and calendars. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="42">
              <name>Format</name>
              <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="400772">
                  <text>PDF</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
          </elementContainer>
        </elementSet>
      </elementSetContainer>
    </collection>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404698">
                <text>1999 The Collector as Bookbinder: The Piscatorial Bindings of S.A. Neff, Jr.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="49">
            <name>Subject</name>
            <description>The topic of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404699">
                <text>Exhibition programs</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="39">
            <name>Creator</name>
            <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404700">
                <text>S.A. Neff Jr.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404701">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404702">
                <text>1999</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="42">
            <name>Format</name>
            <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404703">
                <text>PDF</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="51">
            <name>Type</name>
            <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404704">
                <text>Exhibition Book</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="51517" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="47089">
        <src>https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/files/original/388a882d0a935ac7fb663f7ed5c634fb.pdf</src>
        <authentication>b4ec9a0e2c2db91a0831f26de3405405</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="404689">
                    <text>■

if '

■■

. g.

J

I

�©IF
Ml BW
AMERICAN MASTERS
co. 1910-cq. ^960

§©&amp;©©« A^T ©ALLIW
C@1ULI1©I1
APRIL 12-MAY 17, 1981
E.S. FARLEY LIBRARY
WILKES UNIVERSITY
wilkes-barre^pa.

Sponsored by the

Pennsylvania Council on the Arts
and
The John Sloan Memorial Foundation

3

�FOREWORD
This exhibition is devoted to works by twenty-six
American artists who studied under members of The Eight,
one of the seminal groups of early twentieth century
progressive artists in this country. This show provides a
sequel to our 1979 exhibition of The Eight themselves.

No attempt has been made here to be comprehensive,
since over a period of some forty years there were literally
hundreds of students, representing all degrees of
achievement. The Eight unquestionally influenced many
artists who were not their students, as well, although those
influences are usually more difficult to ascertain. The artists
chosen for this exhibition are generally regarded as major
figures in American art, and together they represent a wide
range of styles and attitudes, indeed, a virtual cross-section
of art in the United States between 1910 and 1960. The
exhibition, therefore, illuminates the vitality and diversity
of that period, as it also defines, at least in part, the
heritage of those among The Eight who shared their ideals
through teaching.

Numerous persons and institutions deserve recognition
for their important contributions to this project. I should
first like to extend our deep appreciation to the lenders,
whose generosity provided the works which make up the
exhibition. We are also greatly indebted to the John Sloan
Memorial Foundation and the Pennsylvania Council for the
Arts, which provided the funding for the project.
I wish to thank personally those persons in the gallery
and at the college whose help and cooperation were
significant: Cara Berryman, Exhibitions Coordinator;
Albert Margolies, chairman of the Advisory Commission,
and the members of the Commission; Dr. Thomas Kelly,
Dean of External Affairs; and Robert S. Capin, President
of the College.

4

Finally, I extend special thanks to Mrs. Helen Farr Sloan
for her invaluable advice and support, and for her
introductory essay in this catalogue.

, ARCHNS ...

£ 0 Ri) G i '■

WILLIAM STERLING
Director

INTRODUCTI
by
Helen Farr Slot

Any serious thoughtful observer o
paintings by the group of artists knc
would be puzzled by the term Ashcc
identify the work they showed at M
Words, published long after the evei
indelible impression, a misleading in
philosophy that brought these artists
grouped around Robert Henri. He w
the progressive avant-garde at the ti
man John Sloan called "The Abraha
Art."
The diversity of personalities, tale
styles of painting shown by those ei
aspect of their philosophy: respect fi
talent, and the desire to provide opj
flourish, with freedom of expression
demonstrate the value of work done
working for themselves unfettered b
commercial demands; on their own
"independent" creative personalities,
they had a common interest in depit
world. (Even Davies' lyrical nymph:
landscapes are idealized concepts of
There has often been a mistaken ide
interest in politics, or a desire to de]
fact, Sloan was the only member of
became interested in political matter
years after that exhibition. As for ti
Henri encouraged his friends and sti
the everyday world of city and com
city subjects show everyday people
Parks and restaurants and bathing t
Sloan called his subject matter: "Bit:

�y, I extend special thanks to Mrs. Helen Farr Sloan
nvaluable advice and support, and for her
tory essay in this catalogue.
WILLIAM STERLING
Director

I

INTRODUCTION
by
Helen Farr Sloan
Any serious thoughtful observer of an exhibition of
paintings by the group of artists known as "The Eight"
would be puzzled by the term Ashcan school used to
identify the work they showed at Macbeth Gallery in 1908.
Words, published long after the event, have left an
indelible impression, a misleading interpretation of the
philosophy that brought these artists together as friends
grouped around Robert Henri. He was the natural leader of
the progressive avant-garde at the turn of the century, the
man John Sloan called "The Abraham Lincoln of American
Art."

The diversity of personalities, talents, and concomitant
styles of painting shown by those eight artists reveal one
aspect of their philosophy: respect for diversity of creative
talent, and the desire to provide opportunities for art to
flourish, with freedom of expression. They wanted to
demonstrate the value of work done by American artists,
working for themselves unfettered by academic or
commercial demands; on their own initiative as
"independent" creative personalities. At that time, in 1908,
they had a common interest in depicting the everyday
world. (Even Davies' lyrical nymphs in mountain
landscapes are idealized concepts of a natural real world.)
There has often been a mistaken idea that the group had an
interest in politics, or a desire to depict urban slums. In
fact, Sloan was the only member of the group who ever
became interested in political matters, and not until several
years after that exhibition. As for the subject matter, while
Henri encouraged his friends and students to paint life —
the everyday world of city and countryside — most of the
city subjects show everyday people engaged in recreation.
Parks and restaurants and bathing beaches provided what
Sloan called his subject matter: "Bits of joy in human life."

The series of independent group shows, beginning in
1901 at the Allan Gallery and culminating in the large
Independent Show of 1910, provided experience in
organizing exhibitions. The 1910 show was a precursor of
the Armory Show of 1913 which brought an illuminating
cross-section of modem art to this country for the first
time. These exhibitions were organized by the artists,
largely financed by themselves and in the case of the 1913
Armory Show, a few art collectors like Mrs. Harry Payne
Whitney and Miss Lizzie Bliss. The friends and followers of
The Eight taught their contemporaries the importance of
voluntary public service, that very fine old characteristic of
America's pioneers. The defense of independence, the
protection of diversity in democratic cultural institutions;
these are principles which the group taught in practical
form.

!

Several of The Eight were also teachers of drawing and
painting in the formal sense. Henri and Sloan and George
Luks taught for many years, both privately and at schools
like the New York School of Art, and the Art Students
League. Some of their most distinguished pupils are seen in
this exhibition. It is so good to see that there is a happy
extraordinary variety of work — none of it imitating the
original teachers. For, in fact, a number of them, having
learned the lesson of responsible independence (freedom,
not license), learned again from other teachers like Kenneth
Hayes Millar or Jan Matulka some insights which helped
their talents to develop yet another synthesis. In every case
the talent has been forged with integrity.
In addition to the well-known teachers who had formal
classes, it may be forgotten that a man like Maurice
Prendergast had pupils who learned to appreciate the
superb design and color of medieval miniatures from France
and Persia and India, from him and his brother Charles.
And it was Prendergast whose appreciation for Cezanne
stimulated interest on the part of his friends who had not
seen the work of that great modem, who died in 1906. In
Sloan's day of 1910 he tells of finding an article in The

90-17:

5

�fast u1

Burlington Magazine, "Was much interested in the work of
Cezanne, some of which was reproduced. A big man this,
his fame is to grow." Of course Sloan had never been able
to go abroad, having to support his family from the age of
sixteen; but even if he had gone to Paris he might not have
had the opportunity to see much work by the moderns in
the Nineties. Van Wyck Brooks, who knew Prendergast,
said that Sloan told him how Prendergast would come in
the room and repeat to his friends: "You should know
Cezanne I" It was not until the Armory Show exhibited a
group of Cezanne's paintings that the work was known in
color, in this country. Now that we are accustomed to
superb color reproductions in books that survey the world
of Impressionists and Modernists, it is exceedingly hard to
realize that artists, even those who lived for years in
France, were not really familiar with the work. It was
shown so little, in a few independent shows, in restaurants
and shops run by paint dealers. Maybe it has been more
exciting for art students and even mature artists, to make
some discoveries, bit by bit — to assimilate fresh ideas
without being swamped by what Lewis Mumford has
described as image-fatigue, being punch-drunk on
familiarity with too much art.
Artists at the time of The Eight were not over-exposed.
Their immediate problem was that in this country there
were so few places to exhibit work. The academic juries
had a rigid political control over what got into the big
public exhibitions. There were very few art dealers.
Sentimental realism, genteel subject matter, imitation
impressionism; these styles and subjects were acceptable.
"The Eight" was formed by an accidental encounter with
the jury system of the National Academy. It was a little
protest made by associates of Robert Henri who had been
shocked by the negative action of a jury that threw out the
work of his students and friends. The show was organized
spontaneously. There was no purpose other than to
demonstrate the need to encourage the idea of "Open
Door" exhibitions, such as the 1910 Independent Show that

6

they were able to organize later. (Henri also initiated the
MacDowell jury system, based on proportional
representation.) The pupils and associates of the men
around Henri have carried back to all parts of the United
States this attitude toward open door exhibitions,
opportunities to show by both professional and amateur
artists. They have been a leavening in the world of
American art. Their viewpoint in one direction was
"inclusive — open the doors of opportunity" but they were
not opposed to the principle that Alfred Stieglitz
advocated, "exclusive — selection of quality." Only the
Henri crowd felt that the open door must come first, to
counteract the power politics of fashion in art institutions.
It would always be necessary to demonstrate and defend
the democratic principle in cultural matters to encourage
variety of expression, to respect independence.
The wisdom of this point of view should be clear from
study of cultural history in the past hundred years.
Suppose Ryder had stopped painting because his work was
not appreciated critically and financially! What a gap there
would be in our artistic heritage if Prendergast had stopped
making frames to earn the free time to paint his joyful
scenes. What an unimaginable loss!
The students who gathered around The Eight held all
kinds of jobs to support their own creative work — night
watchmen, accountants, dish washers, illustrators,
designers, actors and authors. Some became administrators
of the WPA art projects. Several became known as
teachers. Richard Lahey ran the Corcoran School of Art,
and Kimon Nicolaides' book The Natural Way to Draw has
reached several generations of art students.

Today the historical situation for young artists is so
different from that faced by The Eight. Now there are more
opportunities to obtain college scholarships and to exhibit
creative work.. New York is not the only art center in the
country. Contemporary museums have been established in
many places. There is perhaps a more insidious pressure to

be influenced by the
, a sefiO.U. ,\
contemporary^• cost
.
be
creative
-ship
of support. Recent
Recent

"

n.
history d-’t- ‘
oTce agairX only a small percentage
a
can survive withonly
integrity
by counting
&gt;ivf *
sales. Henri, for instance, made a col­
the
itis portrait painting. In addition to tfound patrons early in his career but Hi
bloomer. He was in his forties before hi
and from that time on he did have patrl
and David Smith had many lean years I
chapter of financial security. Students, j
professional artists need to be reminded]
facts - to keep perspective on their wd
courage to persevere.
1

�rOnHenri also

th

k to aUpJ°f -he ’men
le

United

ions,
Professional and
in the worldamateur
'of

or* direction was
opportunity" but tb
,at Alfred StiegliS1they

[on of quality." Only the
door must come first, to
fashion in art institutions
o demonstrate and defend
oral matters to encourage
■t independence.

view should be clear from
past hundred years.
inting because his work was
inancially! What a gap there
;e if Prendergast had stopped
time to paint his joyful
loss 1

round The Eight held all
&gt;wn creative work — night
washers, illustrators,
Some became administrators
al became known as
e Corcoran School of Art,,
Draw
he Natural Way to C.
— has

art students.
n for young artists is so
ie Eight. Now there are more
scholarships and to exhi^

,t the only art ce^ished m

TmoTinX- P— tO

contemporary art, a serious pressure for young people to
contend with. The cost of living is more complicated by the
income that must be set aside for taxes. It usually becomes
a necessity for a creative artist to cultivate a side-line in
teaching or craftsmanship which can provide a reliable
means of support. Recent history does teach this lesson
once again that only a small percentage of unique talents
can survive with integrity by counting on contemporary
sales. Henri, for instance, made a comfortable living with
his portrait painting. In addition to the teaching, Bellows
found patrons early in his career but Hopper was a late
bloomer. He was in his forties before his talent matured
and from that time on he did have patronage. Stuart Davis
and David Smith had many lean years before the late
chapter of financial security. Students, and even
professional artists need to be reminded of these realistic
facts — to keep perspective on their work and regain the
courage to persevere.

THE STUDENTS OF THE EIGHT
IN AMERICAN ART
by
William Sterling
"The two dominant forces in my early art education were the
teachings of Robert Henri whose school I attended and the
Armory Show of Modem European art in 1913. These
influences were foremost in forming my ideas and taste about
what a modem picture should be. Both were revolutionary in
character, and stood in direct opposition to traditional and
academic concepts of art."1
(STUART DAVIS)

After World War II, New York City emerged as the
capital of the art world, thereby ending the leadership of
Paris, which had prevailed for more than a century. For the
first time in its history, the United States led the way to the
most radical developments in art. The war had severely
disrupted the cultural life of Europe, and even before the
war many European artists and intellectuals had emigrated
to America to avoid persecution. They brought with them
their entire repertoire of avant-garde ideas. At the same
time, a generation of American artists achieved its maturity
in modernism and stood ready to explore new frontiers.
Prior to the war, American artists had, for the most part,
been followers rather than leaders. In the late nineteenth
century, a few eccentrics, such as Ryder, created their own
highly personal expressions, but had little influence on their
contemporaries. Several others, such as Whistler and
Cassatt, managed to join the European avant-garde, but
they remained expatriates. The earliest stirrings of an
independent American modernist movement came in the
first two decades of this century. In 1908, the famous
exhibition of The Eight marked the first significant
repudiation of academic dogma and style in art.

The Eight, comprised of Robert Henri, John Sloan,
George Luks, Ernest Lawson, William Glackens, Everett
Shinn, Arthur B. Davies, and Maurice Prendergast, were
never a cohesive group. They were simply congenial spirits
who came together for a single exhibition at New York's
Macbeth Gallery. But that exhibition was one of the salient

�st&amp;EfcaafS

events of American art. Like the earlier independent salons
of the Realists and the Impressionists in France, it struck a
blow for artistic freedom in the face of a rigidly
conservative academy system.

Two years later, Henri, Sloan, Davies, and Walt Kuhn
put together a far larger show, the Exhibition of
Independent Artists. The taste for adventure and the lure of
artistic freedom had begun to spread. The largest and most
influential event came in 1913 with the great Armory Show
in New York, where the latest European styles were
revealed to Americans for the first time en masse. The
effect of these exhibitions was to break, once and for all,
the grip of the academies upon the American art scene. An
American artist could now follow his own course without
fear of automatic isolation, and the forbidden fruit of
European modernism could be tasted without censure.
Two approaches to modernism emerged in the second
decade. Henri and his associates took up a rather
chauvinistic position, urging American artists to develop an
indigenous modernism which would remain independent of
European styles. Various realist styles from the "Ash-Can"
school to the Regionalists of the 1920s represented this
approach. The other approach led to Europe and the
adoption of the latest abstract styles, particularly Cubism,
Futurism, and later. Surrealism. The prime movers of this
approach included the photographer and patron Alfred
Stieglitz, Walter Pach, and Arthur B. Davies (who had
shared Henri's democratic attitudes more than his tastes).
Already by 1915, artists such as Max Weber and Marsden
Hartley had gone to Europe and had embraced the very
newest discoveries.

The "Europeanists" became the more radical group in
terms of artistic style, since they favored the various
abstract forms which the term "Modern Art" has usually
been associated with. The Henri group remained relatively
conservative in its adherence to more or less naturalistic
styles.

Before World War I, The Eight had enjoyed the status of
America's avant-garde. Their unsentimental and
upcompromising realism was coupled with an outspoken
liberalism in matters of artistic self-determination. Most
free-thinking artists of the time adopted their anti­
establishment stance, if not their particular styles. This
situation changed in the late teens and early twenties, as
more and more artists were drawn toward Europe. Some,
like Henri's student Patrick Henry Bruce, became
expatriates. Others, like another student, Stuart Davis,
absorbed European modernism but remained at home.

As a result of the Armory Show and subsequent contacts
with visiting avant-garde personalities from abroad (for
example, Marcel Duchamp and Francis Picabia), America's
knowledge of European developments grew rapidly and
widely. The Stieglitz faction, centered in his "291 Gallery,"
promoted an artistic formalism which shunned any
narrative or illustrational emphasis. Henri's group resisted
such formalism, and resolutely maintained that art must
first of all communicate ideas, and that content must take
precedence over form.

During the years between the two world wars, the
relative prominence of one polarity over the other swung
back and forth. Especially during the Depression,
naturalism enjoyed revitalized popularity, not only in
America but in Europe, too. Early abstractionists such as
Weber, Hartley, and Morgan Russell returned to figurative
work, and generally lost favor with the modernist critics.
Only in the forties did a new and unquestionally more
original form of abstraction come to the fore in America. It
was then that the Abstract Expressionists, led by Pollock
and Gorky, burst upon the scene, and inherited the mantle
of radicalism from war-torn Europe.
The works which make up this exhibition provide
something close to a cross-section of that vital and varied
period in American art. They also bear witness to the
significant role played by a few brilliant teachers.

p
rx
th^1

&gt;5
2

mu
,'uJ‘

nWmore

UX’rl

idrnt

Uont^nt
things. I htfBrh you myopm *

“dl v.,u some thmg, about t
how Then you must
&gt;
ejpcrkrtce and hard work

The students of The Eigh

cross-section of American &lt;
and forties. From figurativ*
Hopper to abstractionists li
every new and vital directii
among The Eight who wert
imposed narrow doctrine. (
an atmosphere of discipline

During that era of lmrnei
immunity, as well as in it
role Played by the sources
Oration was enn

wd*eArmorys?rmOus-

new ideas and7c h°W °pei

Ua^alloif°rniS- ^tit
F°rs^youendarti^toe&gt;

?OU^torouJartls^ the
atalyst

�had g'

'

■hthA

aMh

I
tatUs

of

' sejf-d
an Ouh
deterjriinaH
PcAen

eir Particular

toWard
as
Bruce. becUar°Pe- Some,

ler student St

'The best advice I have ever given to students under me has
been nest this: ‘Educate yourself. do not let me educate you . .
' Real students go out of beaten paths, whether beaten by
themsefess or by others. and have adventure with the
unknown.”2
(ROBERT HENRI)

3nalit^dfrS^S|puen\ ^ntacts

IVnuteoer the Henri School may have lacked in systematic
discipline was more than made up for by positive contributions
... Sy developing the student's confidence in his own
perceptions, it gave his work a freshness and personality that
was lacking in the student work of other schools." 3
(STUART DAVIS)

entered iohis -291
i which shunned any
Basis. Henri's group resisted

i don't want to interfere with your way of seeing, if you are
seeing things. 1 have no tricks to teach you. I don't want to
teach you my opinions, but if you can get hold of my point of
view 1 don't think it will hurt you. I am here to help you. I
want to help you find a purpose, a reason for painting. I can
tell you some things about the "how" to paint. Not any one
'how.' Then you must find your way through your own
experience and hard work. ‘ *
(JOHN SLOAN)

r maintained that art must
and that content must take

te two world wars, the
larity over the other swung
ing the Depression,
popularity, not only in
arly abstractionists such as
Russell returned to figurative
■ with the modernist critics,
ind unquestionally more
,me to the fore in America. It
,ressionists, led by Pollock
"“and inherited

jrope.
his exhibition provide
ion of that vital and[ varied
to the
also bear witness
teachers.
v brilliant

The students of The Eight do indeed constitute a
cross-section of American art during the twenties, thirties,
and forties. From figurative painters like Bellows and
Hopper to abstractionists like Davis and Gottlieb, virtually
every’ new and vital direction was represented. Those
among The Eight who were active as teachers by no means
imposed narrow doctrine. On the contrary, they cultivated
an atmosphere of disciplined self-determination.
During that era of immense growth in America's artistic
community, as well as in its aesthetic sophistication, the
role played by the sources of artistic information and
inspiration was enormous. Exhibitions such as The Eight
and the Armory Show opened eyes and minds to radically
new ideas and forms. Institutions like the Art Students
League allowed artists to experiment with those new ideas.
For some young artists, the very sight of the new was
enough to rouse them into action, but for most, the teacher
remained a crucial catalyst in their transformation.

There were a number of important teachers in the early
twentieth century who are identifiable today by the large
number of major artists who studied with them. Preeminent
with Robert Henri and John Sloan were William Merritt
Chase, Kenneth Hayes Miller, and Arthur W. Dow.
Probably as many as half of America's historically
significant painters, maturing in the teens, twenties, and
thirties, studied under one or more of these men. Other
than Hans Hofmann and Joseph Albers, perhaps, no
teachers since that time have enjoyed such wide influence.
Today, as even the formerly most provincial sections of
our country have become cosmopolitan (at least in their
best schools), the teaching of art has become highly
decentralized. New York City may still be the major hub of
progressive artistic activity, but most New York artists
arrive there after their training, nowadays. Virtually every
school and every teacher across the land have ready access
to the same periodicals, the same reproductions, and often
the same exhibitions.

Things were different at the beginning of the century. A
few important art academies, and within them a few
outstanding instructors, dominated art training in this
country, and to some extent aesthetic values as well.
Robert Henri had been the prime mover, the original leader
of those Philadelphians who made up the nucleus of The
Eight: Sloan, Luks, Shinn, and Glackens. Sloan and Luks,
in particular, followed Henri in the pursuit of teaching.
Lawson and Prendergast also took students on occasion,
but they never had the broad impact of Henri and Sloan.
Glackens and Davies never taught, although Davies
wielded much influence through his activities as an
organizer, supporter, and critic. The students of The Eight,
therefore, were mostly students of only three members of
the group: Henri, Sloan and Luks.
Even before their landmark exhibition, Henri was
teaching at the New York School of Art, which was run by
William Merritt Chase. He held forth there from 1903 until
1907, then ran his own school until 1912. After that, he

9

�i3*7h
&lt;tud^
?tdc&gt;pFerf of
\list* ”

r
taught at the Art Students League, as well as the
progressive Ferrer School. Henri was a born teacher, a
charismatic man with strong opinions, sharp insights, and
cutting wit. As often as not, his classroom discussions dealt
with literature, music, or philosophy. Life was the stuff of
art, and Henri encouraged his students to study life as
vigorously as they studied art. As Stuart Davis said of his
mentor's approach, "art was not a matter of rules and
techniques, or the search for an absolute ideal of beauty. It
was the expression of ideas and emotions about the life of
the time." Henri's method was regarded as radical at the
time, but his aim seems clear enough today. He sought to
instill his students with a sense of art's relevance to real
experience.

■

1

John Sloan continued this approach with equal
enthusiasm and success. Having taken pupils as early as
1912, he joined the faculty of the Art Student's League in
1916. In 1931, he was elected president of the League,
although he resigned the following year after a heated
quarrel with the governing board over its refusal to hire the
German emigre modernist, George Grosz. He left the
League for three years, during which time he taught at
Archipenko's Ecole d'Arte and took over the Luks School
of Painting upon the death of George Luks in 1933.

i

s

I

During the twenties, Sloan's classes were immensely
popular, and like Henri's, they were lively centers of
criticism, philosophy, politics, and humor. Sloan shared
Henri's sense of the priority of ideas and feeling in painting,
as well as his disapproval of "art for art's sake." Yet, Sloan
was by no means insensitive to the formalistic concerns of
art, which were central to so many modern movements. He
once stated that "the subject may be of first importance to
the artist when he starts a picture, but it should be of least
importance in the finished product. The subject is of no
aesthetic significance." 5

This attitude put Sloan in tune with the younger
generation. One of Stuart Davis' few criticisms of Henri

10

had been that the latter placed too much emphasis on
subject matter. Indeed, Henri, much more than Sloan, had
resisted the formalistic preoccupations of the Cubists.
Fauves, and Futurists, and had sought to minimize their
influence on American modernism.

If Henri and Sloan had had only their artistic style to
offer their students, little more than a new generation of
"Ash-Can" painters would have emerged from their classes.
What these teachers did offer their students was
considerably more significant. It was an attitude about art
and what it meant to be an artist in the twentieth century;
it was an attitude about freedom which allowed the student
to question any rule or tradition or approach, not
excluding those of Henri and Sloan themselves.
It is on this basis that an exhibition of artists so diverse
in style can reveal something about the course of modern
art in America. Some of these artists studied long and
faithfully under one master or the other. Others came into
the fold for only a year or less, and never said much about
their experience. But it is difficult to imagine that any
impressionable young art student was not touched by the
spirit of freedom, candor, and common sense which was to
be encountered in the classes of Henri and Sloan. Although
these masters never became radicals in style, they promoted
an openness to new ideas which allowed their students
unusual latitude in those days. They were the "progressive
educators" of the art schools.

Robert Henri counted among his students, in addition to
the aforementioned Stuart Davis, such determined
modernists as Patrick Henry Bruce, Morgan Russell, Man
Ray, Walter Pach, and Arnold Friedman. Less radical but
no less important were Edward Hopper, George Bellows,
Rockwell Kent, Guy Pene du Bois, and Glenn Coleman. It
is clear that no common element of style binds these men.
Rather, it is their sense of independence and their search for
an honest means of self-expression which link them to
Henri.

X
1

the P-

?erSedAa&gt;can * J

t&gt;tf

uS e*

aS
J tranS,en

centUrVtic re'leCtlL’

at,endTnyofhi5f^afstrl,ctUr€h bv
^cametobe^

realistsd Giff°rd
CeorgeBelloWS an nd grandeur of t

conned vvithormah US
(
modem today than Hopper ,
modernism, they continue to speak .nap
language.

The modernists among Henris student' &lt;
of as defectors who had bolted from the p&lt;
doesn’t appear that the master ever serious
their more radical convictions. For exampl
hvely and friendly correspondence with Pa
5B™ceafter flatter had gone to Pans stl

^£
a&gt;..SS‘wb“d’"Spectrum
nat''ran''rr
the various exhibit;
l

'jfganJ

Stu,

�tHe SSj1'had
rtis«c Styie to
generation of

:r°m their

classes.
ts Was
“itude about art

J’entieth century’;
lowed the student
ach, not
elves.
rtists so diverse
urse of modem
ed long and
Zithers came into
said much about
ne that any
touched by the
nse which was to
Sloan. Although
le, they promoted
heir students
the "progressive

ts, in addition to
errnined
in Russell, Man
Less radical but
ieorge Bellows,
enn Coleman. It

,inds these mentd their search fo

ink them to

Hopper, Bellows, and Coleman remained closer to
Henri's style than many students, but each fashioned a
strong individual manner. Hopper, of course, eventually
emerged as one of the preeminent realists in twentieth
century’ American art. Accepting Henri s view of art as an
authentic reflection of life as most of us experience it.
Hopper added his own sense of the mystery’ of existence
attendant to special moments of transience and solitude.
Like many of his colleagues, he also developed a stronger
awareness of the formal structure of his pictures, so that his
works came to be admired as much by’ abstractionists as by
realists.

need not look closely to see the imprint of his master's
teaching. When Henri sent Davis and the other students
roaming through the streets of New York to capture the
real pulse of the city, he planted the seed which ultimately
gave Davis' cubism its highly original stamp. Images of city
life, from billboards and signs to chain-link fences and
cigarette wrappers, were transmitted through jazz-like
rhythms and blasting colors. Brasher, bolder, and cleaner
than its European counterparts, Davis' cubism epitomized
the energy and efficiency of America in the early twentieth
century. Henri's "Ash-Can" scene had been distilled into its
elemental shapes and rhythms.

George Bellows and Gifford Beal responded to Henri's
feeling for the energy’ and grandeur of the American scene,
and anticipated the Regionalists in their muscular, almost
romantic vision of both city and country’. Bellows' brash,
bravura manner was particularly close to Henri's style. Less
concerned with formalist structure, his works look less
modem today than Hopper's, but outside the context of
modernism, they continue to speak in a powerful expressive
language.

John Sloan's roster of students was equally impressive
and equally diverse. Perhaps because he was dealing with a
younger generation than had Henri, more of his famous
students went on into abstraction. Adolph Gottlieb, Barnett
Newman, and the sculptors Alexander Calder and David
Smith were among the most influential and radical artists
of the forties and fifties, and participated in America's
succession to leadership in the world of art. As with Henri,
it was Sloan's persona and philosophy rather than his
artistic style which most affected these later masters.

The modernists among Henri's students could be thought
of as defectors who had bolted from the pack, but it
doesn't appear that the master ever seriously objected to
their more radical convictions. For example, he kept up a
lively and friendly correspondence with Patrick Henry
Bruce after the latter had gone to Paris, studied with
Matisse, and developed his own abstract style. It is also
true that he accepted a wide spectrum of modernists into
the various exhibitions he helped to organize between 1908
and 1918. While he remained wary of modernism, Henri
was really hostile only to reactionary academicism.

Of the modernists who studied with Henri, none was
more brilliant than Stuart Davis, who is generally regarded
as one of the greatest painters America has yet produced.
Stylistically, his art veered decisively toward synthetic
cubism a few years after he left Henri's studio, but one

Sloan was less wary of European modernism than Henri
had been, even though he was one of the few major
American artists of the time who never visited Europe.
Nevertheless, he took a keen interest in the work of men
such as Matisse and Picasso, and even shared their interest
in African and Pre-Columbian art. Furthermore, he actively
supported modernism in his role as president of the Society
of Independent Artists, which had been founded in 1917 by
Marcel Duchamp, Man Ray, Walter Pach, William
Glackens and others, and which remained an important
sustainer of progressive artists until 1944. While he never
painted abstractly himself, Sloan said he had learned a
great deal about artistic form from the "ultra-moderns."
Of course, Sloan also had a devoted following of realists,
such as Reginald Marsh and Aaron Bohrod. Reginald

11

�SO the
Marsh, as an inheritor of the "Ash-Can" tradition, became
a virtual alter-ego to his contemporary, Edward Hopper.
He filled Hopper's silent streets and desolate interiors with
teeming life, and in spirit and imagery, if not in style,
paralleled the art of Stuart Davis, as well.

Perhaps because of his own experience as an illustrator
over the years, Sloan helped to train some of America's
leading illustrators, among them Peggy Bacon, Cecil Bell,
and Roger Tory Peterson, as well as outstanding
cartoonists such as Otto Soglow (famous for "The Little
King"), Don Freeman, and Chon Day. Consistent with his
democratic attitudes, Sloan made no sharp distinctions
between illustration and "fine art."

II

The catholicity of Sloan's teaching and influence is
underscored by the prominence and popularity he enjoyed
between the two wars. As a practitioner of realism on the
one hand and a supporter of modernism on the other, he
easily adjusted to the changing tides of taste which
characterized this period. The initial burst of American
modernism which followed the Armory Show of 1913 and
seemed destined to dominate the American art scene for the
generation to come actually subsided after World War I.
As in Europe, the energy of radicalism was temporarily
spent, and many of the avant-garde were disillusioned by
the enormous destruction of the war. In America, the
populace adopted a position of isolationism, and American
artists, by and large, turned to scene painting and social
realism. Just as the fires of modernism were being stoked
up again in the late twenties, the Depression dampened
them once more.

I

During the thirties, most of the students of Henri, Sloan,
and Luks took part, with thousands of other American
artists, in the Federal Arts Project under the W.P.A. Even
before that time, many of them had been politically active,
usually on the left, Sloan's classes remained a congenial
place for social-minded young artists, although his own
socialist activism had diminished over the years. In his

■

12

youth, Sloan had been a committed radical, and in 1910,
he had run, unsuccessfully, for the New York State
Assembly on the Socialist ticket. Shortly thereafter, he
became art director for the radical magazine "The Masses."
Many students of Henri and Sloan worked at one time or
another as political cartoonists, including Davis, Coleman,
Soglow, and William Gropper. Philip Evergood, a student
of Luks, was also one of the outstanding "political" painters
of the thirties and forties.

The Depression did not lead to a significant new wave of
socialist art in America, however. Nor did Regionalist
naturalism remain for long the dominant trend. The
modernists, dispersed though they were, stood ready to
return to the fore. The world of the twentieth century, in
its technological and existentialist complexity, was
ultimately their world. Marsh, Beal, and du Bois no longer
seemed to be as relevant as Gottlieb, Newman, and Smith.
The students of The Eight had spanned the extremes of
American art in the first half of our century.

", . . (a student should) cultivate an attitude toward his studies
which is both flexible and critical. It should be flexible enough
so that he can change his mind as often as need be; and it
should be critical in that he need not take either the professed
'modem' or the professed 'conservative' at their own
evaluation." •
(JOHN SLOAN)

. Le'lderS Altschul
An°nyI11C'&lt; - Arthur
u Mr5'
, MuseUrP

ierican

Museum of Art

The But‘e

°

Herbert F. )°h

M,„.r. Ar.
.IM—'

Gallery

Everhart Museum of Natural Hist.

Scranton
Hirshhom Museum and Sculpture

The Smithsonian Institution
National Museum of American Ar
The Smithsonian Institution
The Pennsylvania State University

Princeton University, Art Museum

NOTES

Rutgers University, Art Gallery
Smith College, Museum of Art

1. Kelder, Diane (ed.) Stuart Davis (New York, 1971)
p. 20
2. Henri, Robert, The Art Spirit (Philadelphia, 1951)
pp. 134,165
3. Kelder, Stuart Davis, p. 22

4. Sloan, John, Gist of Art (New York, 1977) p. 7
5. Sloan, Gist of Art, p. 41
6. Sloan, Gist of Art, p, 11

An Cod^

um.,icanAr

�J radical
bortlv

State

r^tly theIxiagazine .- he Masses "
Worked at
°ne time or'
uding DaVis c 7
ndln8

leman,
political”student
Painters

a?

^significant new wave of
did Regionalist eof
imant trend. The
were, stood ready to
e twentieth century, in
omplexity, was
I, and du Bois no longer
b, Newman, and Smith,
med the extremes of
r century.
itude toward his studies
hould be flexible enough
•n as need be; and it
ake either the professed
e' at their own
(JOHN SLOAN)

LENDERS TO THE EXHIBITION
Anonymous Lenders

Mr. and Mrs. Arthur Altschul
The Brooklyn Museum
The Butler Institution of American Art, Youngstown
Carnegie Institute, Museum of Art, Pittsburgh
University of Connecticut, William Benton Museum of Art

Cornell University, Herbert F. Johnson Museum of Art
Delaware Art Museum
University of Delaware, Gallery’

Everhart Museum of Natural History’, Science and Art,
Scranton
Hirshhom Museum and Sculpture Garden,
The Smithsonian Institution

National Museum of American Art,
The Smithsonian Institution
The Pennsylvania State University, Museum of Art

LIST OF WORKS
1.
BACON, Peggy
John Sloan's Lecture
etching, 9" x 11"
Delaware Art Museum; gift of Helen Farr Sloan
2.
BACON, Peggy
A Simple Life (1954)
watercolor, 24" x 181//"
Syracuse University, Art Collections

3.
BEAL, Gifford
Bareback Rider
oil on canvas, 18" x 36"
Private Collection
4.
BELLOWS, George
Life Class
lithograph, 19" x 251//”
The Pennsylvania State University Museum of Art

Princeton University, Art Museum
Rutgers University, Art Gallery

Smith College, Museum of Art

5 (New York, 1971)

Syracuse University, Art Collections
Wadsworth Atheneum, Hartford

’hiladelphia, 1951)

fork, 1977) P- 7

Whitney Museum of American Art, Nev/ York City

5.
BELLOWS, George
Summer Surf (1914)
oil on board, 18" x 22”
Delaware Art Museum, gift of the Friends of Art

6.
BRUCE, Patrick Henry
Peinture/Nature Morte (Abstract) (1933)
oil on canvas, 35" x 46"
Museum of Art, Carnegie Institute, Pittsburgh;
gift of G. David Thompson, 1956

13

�iii:

i\ I
I

i

7.
CALDER, Alexander
Trapeze Artists
pen and ink, 0.55m x 0.76m
The Art Museum, Princeton University; gift of
Mrs. Harper, in memory of Raymond H. Harper

13.
DAVIS, Stuart
Gloucester Landscape (1918)
oil on canvas, 24" x 30"
Rutgers University Art Gallery,
New Brunswick, New Jersey

gatc^-

8.
CALDER, Alexander
Brie &amp; Brae (1963)
gouache, T7" x 40"
Syracuse University, Art Collections

14.
DU BOIS, Guy Pene
Conversation
oil on board, 13%6" x 9%"
Wadsworth Atheneum, Hartford, The Ella Gallup Sumner
and Mary Catlin Sumner Collection

Mood (1909)
oil on canvas, 60'
Museum
Whitney
t of the Artist,

9.
COLEMAN, Glenn O.
Gloucester Harbor
oil on canvas, 34" x 25"
The Brooklyn Museum, gift of
Mr. and Mrs. Alan H. Temple

15.
DU BOIS, Guy Pene
Yvonne (1930)
oil on canvas, 2136" x 1736"
Collection of Mr. and Mrs. Arthur G. Altschul

10.
DASBURG, Andrew
Poppies
oil on canvas, 4034" x 2634"
Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden,
Smithsonian Institution

16.
EVERGOOD, Philip
Canadian Gold Mine (1943)
oil on canvas, 25" x 30"
Herbert F. Johnson Museum of Art, Cornell University,
gift of Harry N. Abrams

11.
DAVIS, Stuart
Au Bon Coin (1928-29)
lithograph, 1134" x 936"
University of Delaware Gallery

17.
EVERGOOD, Philip
Rider on Pink Horse (ca. 1945)
oil on canvas, 16" x 12"
Everhart Museum of Natural History, Science and Art,
Scranton

12.
DAVIS, Stuart
Composition (1935)
oil on canvas, 2234" x 30"
National Museum of American Art, Smithsonian Institution
(transfer from General Services Administration)

I

14

18.
FRIEDMAN, Arnold
Blue River
oil on canvas, 24" x 30"
The Butler Institute of American Art, Youngstown, Ohio

farn

oil on Mu:
pelaware Art

?OTTi^Ado1

GOTTLIEB, Adol
Nigld Glow (1971
aquatint, 34" x 26
Delaware Art Mu:

22.
GOTTLIEB, Adol
Seer (1947)
oil on masonite, 3
The Butler Institut
23.
GROPPER, Willia
The Senate
lithograph, 14" x :
Delaware Art Mus

24.
HIRSCH, Joseph
Fr»ncis and Bird (
oil
on canvas, 27"
PriVate Collection

�i)

19.
GATCH, Lee
Pennsylvania Farm (1936)
oil on canvas, 14' x 36"
Delaware Art Museum, John L. Sexton bequest

ery,

f

on°ecHonhe

Gallup Sum^r

Arthur G. Altschul

of Art, Cornell University,

25.
HOPPER, Edward
Artist Seated at Easel (ca. 1903)
oil on canvas, 18' x 10"
The William Benton Museum of Art,
The University of Connecticut, Anonymous Donor

20.
GOTTLIEB, Adolph
Mood (1969)
oil on canvas, 60" x 40'
Whitney Museum of American Art, New York;
gift of the Artist, 1969 (69.150)

26.
HOPPER, Edward
The Cat Boat
etching, 8" x 10"
The Butler Institute of American Art, Youngstown, Ohio

21.
GOTTLIEB, Adolph
Night Glow (1971)
aquatint, 34" x IbW"
Delaware Art Museum, gift of Mrs. H. Rodney Sharp

27.
KENT, Rockwell
Northern Light
woodcut, 5Vz" x 8%"
Delaware Art Museum, gift of Mrs. A. Ralph Snyder

22.
GO11LIEB, Adolph
Seer (1947)
oil on masonite, 30' x 24"
The Butler Institute of American Art, Youngstown, Ohio

28.
MARSH, Reginald
Coney Island Beach (1934)
etching, 13" x 10%"
Museum of Art, The Pennsylvania State University

23.
GROPPER, William
The Senate
lithograph, 14' x 18'
Delaware Art Museum, gift of Helen Farr Sloan

29.
MARSH, Reginald
Lehigh Valley
watercolor, 14" x 20"
The Butler Institute of American Art, Youngstown, Ohio

24.
HIRSCH, Joseph
Francis and Bird (1979)
oil on canvas, 27" x 19"
Private Collection

30.
MARSH, Reginald
Negress and White Girl in Subway (1938)
tempera on masonite, 24" x 18"
The William Benton Museum of Art,
The University of Connecticut, Anonymous Donor

45)

.1 History, Science and Art,

Youngstown, Ohio

rican Art,
is

�31.
MORRIS, George L. K.
New Year's Eve (1945-46)
oil on canvas, 38" x 30%"
National Museum of American Art,
Smithsonian Institution, Given Anonymously

h

32.
MORRIS, George L. K.
Industrial Landscape (1936-50)
oil on canvas, 49%" x 63% "
National Museum of American Art,
Smithsonian Institution, Given Anonymously
33.
NEWMAN, Barnett
Black and White (1948)
black ink on paper, 24" x 16% "
Smith College Museum of Art,
Northampton, Massachusetts
Gift of Philip C. Johnson, 1952

I
I

34.
RAY, Man
Les Mains Libres: La Femme Portative (1936)
pen and ink, 0.38m x 0.28m
The Art Museum, Princeton University, purchased with the
Laura P. Hall Memorial Fund
35.
RAY, Man
Untitled (1915)
oil on board, IS1/?" x 12% "
National Museum of American Art,
Smithsonian Institution, gift of Flora E. H. Shawan
36.
RUSSELL, Morgan
Nu-Assis (ca. 1923-25)
oil on canvas, 28%" x 21%"
National Museum of American Art,
Smithsonian Institution, Museum Purchase
16

37.
RUSSELL, Morgan
Synchromy (1915-17)
oil on canvas, 12%' x 10%"
Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden,
Smithsonian Institution

38.
SMITH, David
Untitled (1956)
oil and sand on canvas, 73%" x 11"
Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden,
Smithsonian Institution
39.
SOYER, Moses
Three Men (1974)
oil on canvas, 25" x 30"
Museum of Art, The Pennsylvania State University

40.
SPENCER, Niles
Above the Excavation #2 (1949)
oil on board, 12" x 16"
Herbert F. Johnson Museum of Art, Cornell University
41.
SPRINCHORN, Carl
Daisy Fields and Clouds, Shin Pond, Maine (1950)
oil on canvas, 21" x 29"
Private Collection
42.
SPENCER, Niles
The Bay (1937)
oil on canvas, 20" x 32"
Herbert F. Johnson Museum of Art, Cornell University

�10% "
J Sculpture G?r,;
c warden.

THE ARTISTS

PEGGY BACON (1895' 7^Vs” x 11"
1 Sculpture Garden,

'nnsylvania State University

2 (1949)

eum of Art, Cornell University

Born in Ridgefield, Connecticut, Bacon studied painting
at the Art Students League from 1915 to 1920, under John
Sloan, George Bellows, and Kenneth Hayes Miller.
Self-taught as a printmaker she soon gained attention for
her illustrated books. After traveling in Europe between
1920 and 1922, she returned to Woodstock, New York and
a career of uninterrupted success as a painter, illustrator
poet, and fiction writer. Her most famous work is a book
of caricatures of famous contemporary personalities called
Off With Their Heads! (1934)

Aside from her caricatures and other pictures of social
satire, Bacon's work typically focused upon everyday life in
the city. Her style exemplifies the kind of illustration which
flourished under Sloan's influence: a brisk, energetic
handling; dynamic compositions, and graphic vigor. Her
sure use of tensive line may also be compared to the
acerbic style of the great German satirist, George Grosz.
In 1975, Bacon was given a major exhibition at the
National Collection of Fine Arts.

Shin Pond, Maine (1950)

gum

of Art,

Cornell University

17

�II
I

18

GIFFORD BEAL (1879-1956)

GEORGE BELLOWS (1882-1925)

A native of New York City, Beal graduated from
Princeton University before going on to the Art Students'
League, where he studied painting with Robert Henri,
William Merritt Chase, and Frank DuMond. He joined the
League's faculty and served as its president from 1914 to
1929. Like many painters of his generation, Beal executed
commissions for the Federal Arts Project of the W.P.A. in
the 1930's, including the mural in the Allentown,
Pennsylvania post office.

Bellows came from Columbus, Ohio. He studied with
Henri from 1904-1906, and became the youngest associate
of the National Academy of Design in 1908. He joined the
faculty of the Art Students League in 1910. He became one
of the organizers of the great Armory Show, and with
Prendergast, Glackens, Duchamp and others, was one of
the founders of the Society of Independent Artists in 1917.
His early and continued success was brought to a
premature end by a fatal attack of appendicitis.

Beal, like his contemporary and colleague George
Bellows, produced a muscular romantic naturalism in his
painting, but more often than Bellows, he found his
inspiration in the rural landscape rather than the urban
environment. He also produced dynamic genre subjects,
such as the circus scene in this exhibition. This work
employs the vibrant palette and rich surfaces of the
Impressionists and Fauves, and clearly echoes Henri's
straightforward and exuberant approach to the subject.

Bellows was one of Henri's most faithful followers.
Nevertheless, he fashioned a distinctive and powerful style.
His early work was particularly fresh and exuberant, and
included some of his most famous pictures, such as the
prize fights and Hudson River views of the city. His style is
often regarded as a paradigm of the American spirit in the
early 20th century: brash, aggressive, optimistic, and
indefatigable. In his last years, he turned to portraits,
which were as sensitive as his earlier works were bold.
Bellows' brisk, graphic style was also well-suited to the
print medium, which he handled with consummate skill.

PATRICK HENRY BRU
A native of Virginia, Bru
Henri in 1902 and 1903. He
with Matisse in 1907, and d
1912, he had become intere:
color experiments of Robert
the Armory Show, and con
European avant-garde movt
evolved his unique manner
the early twenties, which h(
until he gave up painting in
aristocratic spirit, Bruce cot
disinterest in his work. He
and destroyed many of his
New York in 1937. He com
Bruce has been rediscove
by Pop artists and hard-ed^
regarded as one of the mos
American artists of the earl

�I rm

MS

°!OJ-

k

4.

■ BELLOWS (1882-1925)
came from Columbus, Ohio. He studied with
11904-1906, and became the youngest associate
onal Academy of Design in 1908. He joined the
he Art Students League in 1910. He became one
nizers of the great Armory Show, and with
t, Glackens, Duchamp and others, was one of
rs of the Society of Independent Artists in 1917.
nd continued success was brought to a
end by a fatal attack of appendicitis.
vas one of Henri’s most faithful followers,
is, he fashioned a distinctive and powerful style,
■ork was particularly fresh and exuberant, and
me of his most famous pictures, such as the
and Hudson River views of the city. His style is
led as a paradigm of the American spirit in the
tentury: brash, aggressive, optimistic, and
le. In his last years, he turned to portraits,
1 as sensitive as his earlier works were bold,
isk, graphic style was also well-suited to the
tm, which he handled with consummate skill.

/

A native of Virginia, Bruce studied in New York under
Henri in 1902 and 1903. He went to Paris, where he studied
with Matisse in 1907, and developed a Fauve-like style. By
1912. he had become interested in the more systematic
color experiments of Robert Delaunay. Bruce exhibited in
the Armory Show, and continued to be involved with
European avant-garde movements during the war years. He
evolved his unique manner of geometric still-life painting in
the early twenties, which he refined over the next decade
until he gave up painting in 1932. A man of sensitive and
aristocratic spirit, Bruce could not accept the public
disinterest in his work. He became increasingly withdrawn,
and destroyed many of his paintings before returning to
-\ew York in 1937. He committed suicide shortly afterward.
Bruce has been rediscovered in recent years, particularly
by Pop artists and hard-edge painters, and he is now
regarded as one of the most important and original
American artists of the early 20th century.

r

8.

6.

PATRICK HENRY BRUCE (1881-1937)

O

ALEXANDER CALDER (1899-1976)
The son and grandson of eminent American sculptors,
Calder came to his pursuit naturally. Born in Lawnton,
Pennsylvania, he studied mechanical engineering at Stevens
Institute before entering the Art Students League in 1923.
There, he studied painting with Sloan until 1925. The
following year, he went to Europe and began working in
sculpture, initially doing small improvisations in wire and
wood. His contact with the non-objective painter Mondrian
in 1930 spurred his exploration of abstract form.

In 1931, with his creation of the mobile, Calder became
the first American sculptor to stand among the world's
foremost artistic innovators. One of the earliest kinetic
sculptures, the mobile employed space and natural air
movements, as well as boldly colored organic shapes.
Calder's lyrical and playful mobiles and non-moving
stabiles have become distinctive monuments throughout the
world, amalgams of industrial technology and human
poetry. Always an experimenter, Calder worked in all
media. His prints echoed the forms of his sculptures, but
took on an even greater sense of surrealist spontaneity.

19

�GLENN COLEMAN (1887-1932)

ANDREW DASBURG (1887-1979)

An Ohioan, Coleman arrived in New York City in 1905.
He became a student of Henri, and remained one of the
staunchest preservers of the Ash-Can style during the
twenties. Like his predecessors in that style, he sought out
the picturesque comers of the metropolis, and depicted
them with straightforward naturalism. Though he lacked
the bravura and vigor of a Sloan or a Bellows in these
early works, he created honest, well-crafted pictures which
revealed something of the tone of city life of that decade.
Toward the end of his life and under the influence of
Cubism, Coleman began to transmute his urban scenes into
monumental stylizations of the city's architecture. The
more personal vision was, unfortunately, cut short by his
early death.

Dasburg was born in Paris, but his family moved to New
York in 1892. He studied at the Art Students League under
Robert Henri, as well as under Kenyon Cox and Frank
DuMond. From 1909 to 1911, he resided in the city of his
birth, where he came under the influence of the Cubists. He
exhibited Cubist paintings in the Armory Show of 1913,
and Synchromist works (see: Russell) in the Forum
Exhibition of 1916. After these early major appearances, he
rarely exhibited again, and eventually left New York to
take up residence in Taos, New Mexico.

A sensitive and unaggressive man, Coleman received
only sporadic public attention during his life. His friend
Stuart Davis regarded him as one of the most gifted and
unsung American artists of the twenties.

20

Although an early American participant in avant-garde
movements of Europe, and highly regarded by the
Modernists of his generation, Dasburg fell into relative
obscurity until the late fifties. At that time, retrospectives
of his work were held at the Dallas Museum (1957) and the
American Federation of Arts (1959), and just before his
death, Van Deren Coke completed a monograph on his life
li e

and art.

i

STUART DAVIS (1894-1964)

GUY PEN

Son of the art editor of the Philadelphia Press Davis was
early associated with his fathers' co-workers, (and, later,
members of The Eight), Sloan, Luks, Glackens and Shinn.
He left school at 16, and went to New York to study with
Henri. Between 1913 and 1916, he worked chiefly as an
illustrator for The Masses and Harper's Weekly. His taste
for the more avant-garde styles of the day developed out of
the Armory Show, and soon led him to a front-line
position in the American vanguard. His liberal sympathies
brought him editorship of the Art Front, a publication of
the Artists' Union, in 1935.

Bom in b
Chase, DuN
painter, du
with a serie
self-indulgei
mixture of &lt;
decadent m
compatible

Davis created one of the most original variants on
Cubism, one which has been called characteristically
American in its bold simplicity, brash color, and pre-Pop
imagery. His fondness for jazz combined with his
enjoyment of the urban pace to produce the highly staccato
pictorical structure found in much of his work. His W.P.A.
murals, such as the famous one in Radio City Music Hall,
e ped to broaden his reputation, but even without these,
avis would stand among the major painters of the
entieth century. His late works brought him close to a

paint^er ®enerat'on

P°P, Hard-Edge, and Color-Field

Of Frencl
in France, \
and traditic
style and c&lt;
mellowed a
remained d
and worke&lt;
and jouma
His repu
ambiguous
work this s
perspectivf

�I
■

r

W&amp;i

J?

r

t

f ~ iI

7,
12.

moved to New
s League under
and Frank
the city of his
the Cubists. He
ow of 1913,
Forum
ppearances, he
ew York to
i avant-garde

?y the
to relative
•etrospectives
(1957) and the
before his
aph on his life
hfe

15.

STUART DAVIS (1894-1964)

GUY PENE DU BOIS (1884-1958)

Son of the art editor of the Philadelphia Press Davis was
early associated with his fathers' co-workers, (and, later,
members of The Eight), Sloan, Luks. Glackens and Shinn.
He left school at 16, and went to New York to study with
Henri. Between 1913 and 1916, he worked chiefly as an
illustrator for The Masses and Harper s Weekly. His taste
for the more avant-garde styles of the dayT developed out of
the Armory Show, and soon led him to a front-line
position in the American vanguard. His liberal sympathies
brought him editorship of the Art Front, a publication of
the Artists’ Union, in 1935.

Born in New York City, du Bois studied under Henri,
Chase, DuMond, and Miller. An uneven and intermittant
painter, du Bois reached his artistic peak in the twenties
with a series of satirical paintings aimed at the
self-indulgent lifestyle of the wealthy bourgeoisie. An odd
mixture of classical simplicity. Art Deco stylization, and
decadent mood gave his art a "Weimar" atmosphere guite
compatible with that era.

Davis created one of the most original variants on
Cubism, one which has been called characteristically
American in its bold simplicity, brash color, and pre-Pop
imagery. His fondness for jazz combined with his
enjoyment of the urban pace to produce the highly staccato
pictorical structure found in much of his vzork. His W.P.A.
murals, such as the famous one in Radio City Music Hall,
helped to broaden his reputation, but even without these,
Davis would stand among the major painters of the
twentieth century. His late works brought him close to a
younger generation of Pop, Hard-Edge, and Color-Field
painters.

Of French extraction, du Bois spent the years 1924-1930
in France, where he took a deep interest in French culture
and tradition. He was especially fond of the monumental
style and caricature of Daumier. In the 1930s du Bois' style
mellowed and the satire waned, but his art always
remained distinctive. He was also a prolific writer on art,
and worked as an art critic for several major newspapers
and journals.

His reputation over the past few decades has been
ambiguous, but the Corcoran Museum's retrospective of his
work this spring will undoubtedly provide us with a fresh
perspective of du Bois and his place in American art.

21

�&gt;1 \

!

PHILIP EVERGOOD (1901-1973)

ARNOLD FRIEDMAN (1874-1946)

Evergood was born in New York City, and studied at the
Art Students League under George Luks in 1923. He had
already taken a diploma in drawing from London's Slade
School of Art, but Luks urged him to become a painter. An
admirer of Sloan's work, Evergood became a close friend of
Sloan, who spurred his interest in human themes. During
the Depression, he concentrated on social and political
subjects, and was involved in several artists' activist
groups, such as the Artist's Union. During the period of the
W.P.A. art projects, Evergood was supervisor of the easel
painting division for New York.

Born into a poor immigrant family in New York City,
Friedman started work at an early age, and, reminded of
the poverty of his youth, remained employed by the postal
service until his retirement in 1933. He began his art studies
in 1905 at the Art Students League, under Henri who
aroused his enthusiasm for painting. He got to Paris for
several months in 1908, where he took a strong interest in
Seurat's divisionist color techniques. Following the Armory
Show, he began to work abstractly, in a style close to
Russell's Synchromism.

Later in his career, he turned to more personal and
spiritual themes, and became increasingly experimentive
with the painting medium, so much so that his style shows
considerable variation over the years. A difficult painter
to classify, Evergood used elements of expressionism,
surrealism, and cubism as the theme demanded. But his use
of these elements was never academic. It was part of his
ceaseless search for the appropriate impassioned image.
Beneath the modernist veneer, one often felt the presence of
the folklore and mysticism of his Russian heritage.

Lee Gatch grew
at the Maryland In
was a visiting prof
Kroll, and, in Paris
Gatch was strongly
Cubism, but his w&lt;

Friedman's commitment to abstraction was never total,
and he returned to a figurative mode by 1920. Although he
had joined with colleagues such as Bellows, Hopper, and
Coleman in early progressive art activities, he became
increasingly isolated in the twenties. His full-time postal job

expressionistic com
style. He develops
attachment to natu
and textures into h
^d-iston;

left little time for painting and professional involvements.
Only after his retirement could he return to a steady

t935' he lived a ra
medhl§hly methodi

regimen of painting.

resDIUni Iilnited his

Friedman is an interesting example of an early modernist
whose great potential was mitigated by external concerns.
Nevertheless, he did develop a highly personal, if

major Sk Painter it
Sh°Wbythe

incompletely formed style.
22

LEE GATCH (1

�t
J

L

-

[

_

/ £

18.

46)
n New York City,
and, reminded of
ployed by the postal
began his art studies
der Henri who
e got to Paris for
a strong interest in
illowing the Armory
a style close to

____ . 19.

LEE GATCH (1902-1968)

n was never total,
y 1920. Although he
&gt;ws, Hopper, and
ies, he became
s full-time postal job

,nal involvements,
n to a steady

an early
external
srsonaL w

I

Lee Gatch grew up in the Baltimore area, and studied art
at the Maryland Institute during the time that John Sloan
was a visiting professor there. He also studied with Leon
Kroll, and, in Paris, with Andre Lhote. During the thirties,
Gatch was strongly influenced by Impressionism and
Cubism, but his work proceeded basically upon an
expressionistic course, developing into a resonant personal
style. He developed an intense and almost mystical
attachment to nature, and incorporated its colors, forms,
and textures into his often abstract patterns. He even
attached real stones to some of his later canvases. After
1935, he lived a rather reclusive life in rural New Jersey.
His highly methodical and experimentive approach to the
medium limited his output, but he remained a highly
respected painter in the forties and fifties. He was given a
major show by the Whitney Museum in 1960.

rI ?

21.

ADOLPH GOTTLIEB (1903-1974)
A native New Yorker, Gottlieb studied at the Art
Students League under both Henri and Sloan. He also
studied in Paris, Berlin, and Munich during the 1920s. His
development as an artist largely paralleled the major trends
of his day. In the thirties his work dealt with the American
scene and social realism. By 1940, he was immersed in a
more personal magic realism, akin to surrealism. During
the forties, this personal approach developed into a
symbolic and atavistic pictography, not unlike Miro's in
concept, but quite unique in style.

Gottlieb gradually simplified his pictographic imagery
into the spare, but explosive "Burst" paintings of the fifties.
These pictures, contrasting a chaotic form with an holistic
one, became his trademark, and took their place among the
most vital and individual statements of the Abstract
Expressionists. Indeed, his style stood between the florid
spontaneity of Pollock and DeKooning and the austere
colorism of Rothko and Newman.

23

�I
!!

I
EDWARD H

WILLIAM GROPPER (1897-1977)

JOSEPH HIRSCH (1910-

Gropper was the son of a poor New York garment
worker. He dropped out of school in order to help support
the family, but his intense interest and aptitude in art led
him to take courses at the Ferrer School in 1912-13, where
he studied under Henri and Bellows. In 1919, he became a
political cartoonist for the New York Tribune and remained
active as a cartoonist through the twenties. He began
serious painting in 1921.

At 71, the last-bom painter in the exhibition, Hirsch
continues to work in the realist tradition of his mantor
George Luks. Born in Philadelphia he received his first art
training at the Pennsylvania Museum School before moving
on to New York City and Luks' school.

Cropper's outspoken support of radical social reforms
brought him an invitation from writers Theodore Dreiser
and Sinclair Lewis to accompany them on their tour of
Russia in 1927. Social and political themes in an
expressionistic style, reminiscent of Daumier and George
Grosz, dominated his work in the thirties, and made him
one of the most abrasive and effective pictorial satirists of
the day. The Senate, the lithograph shown here, is typical
of this style.

24

Hirsch's great facility won him critical attention very
early in his student years, and his career has flourished
without interruption since then. Although his realism is
readily accessible to a wide public, Hirsch typically endows
it with a subtle strangeness bordering on the surreal. His
subjects cover a broad range, but invariably they contain
humanity, either in situations involving political or social
issues, or in single figures or groups caught in enigmatic
moods or relationships. His technique as a realist tends to
be more painterly than photographic, well within the
tradition of The Eight. Hirsch is also well known for his
drawings and prints.

Bom in Nya&lt;
at the New Yor
visit to Paris, h
as a graphic art
came slowly, b
solid reputatior
Modem Art me

Although alii
movement. Ho]
themes and ima
identical in mo&lt;
Almost always,
waiting, within
and structure g
®°numentality
^d’tionalists

S
ehisd^th,
Respective of
encored He

^1*2

�Hhe exhibition, Hinsch
tradition of his mantor
Ihia he received his first art
Useum School before moving

I school.
In critical attention very
pis career has flourished
I Although his realism is
lie, Hirsch typically endows
Bering on the surreal. His
lit invariably they contain
Ivolving political or social
pups caught in enigmatic
Inique as a realist tends to

Lphic, well within the
| also well known for his

EDWARD HOPPER (1882-1967)

Bom in Nyack, New York. Hopper studied under Henri
at the New York School of Art from 1900 to 1906. After a
visit to Paris, he returned to New York and made his living
as a graphic artist between 1915 and 1923. Recognition
came slowly, but by the early thirties, he had achieved a
solid reputation as a painter. In 1933, the Museum of
Modem Art mounted his first retrospective.
Although allied with the American Scene (or Regionalist)
movement. Hopper's paintings transcended specific regional
themes and images. His deserted rural roadsides were
identical in mood and style to his deserted urban hotels.
Almost always, they involved a spirit of solitude and
waiting, within a simple place. A strong sense of pattern
and structure gave his austere realism an almost abstract
monumentality which appealed to modernists as well as
traditionalists. Hopper's reputation has continued to grow
since his death, and the Whitney Museum's major
retrospective of 1980 (now traveling to Europe)* has only
imderscored Hopper's position as one of America's most
important and revered artists.

ROCKWELL KENT (1882-1971)

Kent was born in Tarrytown, New York. He studied
with Henri, as well as with Chase, Miller, and Thayer. He
is better known as an illustrator and printmaker than as a
painter, and is particularly revered for his wood
engravings. Despite occasional flirtations with modernist
styles, he remained throughout most of his career a
conservative artist, a preserver of heroic romanticism as
manifested in the ruggedness and grandeur of the American
landscape. His best work was bold and direct in concept,
clean and spare in design. His lesser work always
maintained an appealing decorativeness, often reminiscent
of Art Deco design.
Kent was an avid supporter of radical social and political
movements (he was awarded the Lenin Peace Prize in
Moscow in 1967), and used his art to communicate readily
understood images of noble humanity and epic nature. His
utopian vision remained curiously detached from the
nitty-gritty spirit of the Ash-Can school, however.

Because of the comprehensiveness of the Whitney show, we were unable
to obtain a characteristic painting by Hopper.
25

�REGINALD MARSH (1898-1954)

GEORGE L. K. MORRIS (1905-1975)

BARNETT NEWN

Marsh was born in Paris of American parents and grew
up in New Jersey. As art editor of the Yale Record, then
staff artist for Vanity Fair and the New 'York Daily News,
Marsh had developed a pungent naturalistic style even
before he entered the Art Students League in 1926 to study
with Sloan, Luks, and Miller.

A native of New York City, Morris attended Yale
University before entering the Art Students League, where
he worked under Sloan and Miller. His radical artistic spirit
took him to Paris for further study with Leger and
Ozenfant, as well as an intimate association with the
continental avant-garde of the thirties. He edited two
important modernist art journals in Paris, The Miscellany
(1929-31) and Plastique (1937-39). With the outbreak of
World War II, he returned to America permanently, and
joined the faculty of the League in 1943-44.

Newman, like G.Lj
City in 1905 and stud
he attended from 192
Newman's immediate!
mainstream. He work
from 1927 to 1937, aJ
school before he turn!

Marsh's concern for the common man, which also
revealed itself in radical political sympathies, was
manifested in an art filled with images of the working
classes and their urban environment. Street scenes, subway
cars, and Coney Island crowds were typical themes. He
was a fine and facile draftsman and printmaker, and, in
painting, he preferred tempera and watercolor, which
suited small-scale illustration and spontaneity. His stylized
and animated realism became readily identifiable, and made
him an urban counterpart to the rural regionalist painters.
Marsh stands as one of the most prolific and bouyant
interpreters of American life in the twenties and thirties.

Although Morris himself was not among the major
artistic innovators of his day, he was an important
spokesman and catalyst for the modernist cause, and
played a significant role in America's assimilation of
European trends prior to the war. He was one of the
founders of the American Abstract Artists in 1936, (and its
president from 1948 to 1950), in which capacity he helpe
prepare the ground for the revolutionary developments in
American art which followed the war.

Under the influence
with "automatic" drai
"cosmic landscapes" 1
first Abstract Express
Motherwell, and sooi
spokesmen. His austa
began in 1948, and J
such as the creation. |
large, spare, and flat
Color-Field and Mini!
seventies.
1

�R

7

4

1975)

BARNETT NEWMAN (1905-1970)

attended Yale
ents League, where
radical artistic spirit
h Leger and
ation with the
He edited two
-is, The Miscellany
( the outbreak of

Newman, like G.L.K. Morris, was bom in New York
City in 1905 and studied under Sloan at the League, which
he attended from 1922 to 1927. But, unlike Morris,
Newman's immediate course was not into the avant-garde
mainstream. He worked in his father's garment business
from 1927 to 1937, and occasionally taught art in high
school before he turned to a full-time career as an artist.

permanently, ana

1-44.

iong the major
n imp°rtant ,
flst cause, and

^ilati°fnt°he
vaS
(&lt;S
iStS1ancityhehelped
capacl y
ents
ry develops

I

Under the influence of Surrealism, Newman experimented
with "automatic" drawings in 1944, and began a series of
"ccsmic landscapes" in 1945. He became associated with the
first Abstract Expressionists, such as Gottlieb, Rothko, and
Motherwell, and soon became one of their most articulate
spokesmen. His austere and mystical "stripe" paintings
began in 1948, and were founded upon spiritual themes
such as the creation. Newman's canvases grew increasingly
large, spare, and flat, and profoundly influenced the
Color-Field and Minimalist painters of the sixties and
seventies.

Man Ray studied architecture and engineering in his
native Philadelphia before devoting himself to art. He was
a student of Henri, and by 1911 already showed an interest
in the more radical trends of the day. After the Armory
Show, he began working in a Cubist and Futurist manner.
In 1915, he met Marcel Duchamp and became part of that
artist's inner circle, along with Francis Picabia, the collector
Walter Arensburg, and the photographer-dealer, Alfred
Stieglitz.
In this company, Ray became one of the premier
practitioners of Dada, that radical international movement
spawned by World War I and given over to ridicule of all
conventionality. His wit and irony, blended with great
inventiveness, gave Ray's art its variously humorous,
outrageous, and enigmatic character. He worked in all
media, and became especially famous for his rayographs
(images of objects exposed directly on film without a
camera) and his Dada objects.

Except for the 1940s, Ray has spent most of his career in
Paris, and has taken his place among the major modernists.
With his friend Duchamp, Ray has been an important
progenitor of recent neo-Dada and Conceptual art.

27

�yi

jl

hi

I
i

I.
36.

MORGAN RUSSELL (1886-1953)
Russell was born in New York, and studied with Henri
before going to Paris in 1909. There he came under
the influence of Matisse, the Cubists, and the
Futurists. In 1913, with his fellow American Stanton
Macdonald-Wright, he founded the movement called
Synchromism, which was based upon the dynamic use of
color in abstract compositions. This movement paralleled
the contemporary colorism of the French painter Delaunay,
but remained entirely distinctive. Russell thus became one
of the first Americans to make a significant contribution to
modern art at the international level. He brought his
synchromist work to America for the Forum Exhibition of
1916, but its influence here was only modest.

I

Like many other radical artists of his generation,
including Picasso and Matisse, Russell returned to a
figurative style in the twenties. The two works in the
exhibition show his avant-garde style of the teens
(represented by one of his small works of that period) and
his more traditional manner of the twenties.

II

I

28

DAVID SMITH (1906-1965)
Smith was a native of Decatur, Indiana, and attended
colleges in the mid-west and Washington, D.C. before
moving to New York in 1926. He studied painting at the
League with Sloan and with Jan Matulka, and became a
close friend of Stuart Davis. After his painting became
increasingly three-dimensional in character, he turned to
sculpture in the early thirties. In 1933, inspired by Julio
Gonzalez, he began doing welded constructions utilizing
scrap iron. Cubist, Constructivist, and Surrealist influences
predominated at first.
Having worked as a riveter in an auto plant, Smith came
naturally to the industrial "heavy metal" work which has
become so influential on later sculptors. During the forties
and fifties, Smith created spontaneous "drawings in space,
comparable to Abstract Expressionist painting. In the late
fifties, he turned to thin, vertical totems (which he also
rendered in paintings, such as the one shown here). His last
phase, evolving in the sixties, included his "Cubf series,
dynamic clusters of metal boxes. Smith stands with Calder
as one of the most important and influential sculptors of

the twentieth century.

I

�’-1965)
Jecatur, Indiana, and attended
ad Washington, D.C. before
926. He studied painting at the
th Jan Matulka, and became a
is. After his painting became
anal in character, he turned to
ies. In 1933, inspired by Julio
welded constructions utilizing
uctivist, and Surrealist influences
’ter in an auto plant. Smith came
"heavy metal" work which has
iter sculptors. During the forties,
pontaneous "drawings in.space,
pressionist painting, n
ertical totems (w 1C
His last
as the one/kov^?br series,

“■ inds^th«S»na.»thca*r

Sloan and Degas were among the major influences on
Soyer, and he shared with them a strong feeling for
humanity closely and spontaneously observed. His portraits
and genre pictures are rendered with a simple, atmospheric
realism which also embodies subtle moods and, often,
dassical structures. The work in this exhibition was one
of his last paintings, and reveals these aspects of his style
very well.

�■I

•

I
■

I

NILES SPENCER (1893-1952)

CARL SPRINCHORN (1887-1971)

Spencer attended the Rhode Island School of Design in
his native state before moving to New York City. At the
Ferrer School, he studied with Henri and Bellows. Like
Glenn Coleman, Spencer was especially fond of the
architectural scene of the city, and went even farther in
translating it into a Cubist image. Spencer's modernist
vision was at first characterized by a static, cubist
simplicity, virtually devoid of living things. Later, the
blocky forms were flattened into juxtaposed planes
suggestive of the austerest works of Juan Gris and Stuart
Davis. These simple but carefully organized paintings took
on a quiet energy and sophistication of design often lacking
in the earlier works. (Both phases are exhibited here).

A native of Sweden, Sprinchom came to the United
States in 1903 with the intention of studying art with
Robert Henri, whose reputation had become widespread.
He worked with Henri until 1910, and managed that artist's
school for several years. He participated in the Armory
Show of 1913. In the twenties, he directed the New Gallery
which promoted young American and French modernists,
but for much of his life, he traveled widely in this country
and abroad.

Spencer was especially fascinated by industrial scenes, to
which his style was well suited. He joined other American
industrial painters, such as Charles Sheeler, Charles
Demuth, and Ralston Crawford in this respect, as well as in
his rather precisionist aesthetic.

30

Seeking inspiration in nature, Sprinchorn developed
vigorous, expressionist style, well-exemplified in the work
displayed here. Like his friends Marsden Hartley and
Rockwell Kent, he had a special fondness for the rugged
landscape and outdoor life of Maine. Boldly sketched
loggers and fisherman often inhabited his dynamic and
rough-hewn landscapes. Though he resided in America for
most of his adult life, Sprinchom's art bears a powerful
Nordic stamp. The influences of Edvard Munch, the
German Expressionists, and Scandinavian legend and
poetry are all apparent, but from these, Sprinchom
fashioned a distinctive and vital style.

�I

1
1000178354

__H1LKES_COLLEGE

library

II

��</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <collection collectionId="24">
      <elementSetContainer>
        <elementSet elementSetId="1">
          <name>Dublin Core</name>
          <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
          <elementContainer>
            <element elementId="50">
              <name>Title</name>
              <description>A name given to the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367364">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery Exhibition Programs, 1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="41">
              <name>Description</name>
              <description>An account of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367365">
                  <text>Exhibition programs created by the Sordoni Art Gallery from 1973 to the present. &#13;
&#13;
Digitized by Wilkes University Archives interns, Zachary Mendoza and Sophia Kruspha. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="39">
              <name>Creator</name>
              <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367366">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="48">
              <name>Source</name>
              <description>A related resource from which the described resource is derived</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367367">
                  <text>Wilkes University</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="45">
              <name>Publisher</name>
              <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367368">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="40">
              <name>Date</name>
              <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367369">
                  <text>1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="47">
              <name>Rights</name>
              <description>Information about rights held in and over the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367370">
                  <text>Wilkes University retains copyright of these exhibition programs. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="44">
              <name>Language</name>
              <description>A language of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367371">
                  <text>English</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="51">
              <name>Type</name>
              <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367372">
                  <text>Exhibition programs, flyers, and calendars. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="42">
              <name>Format</name>
              <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="400772">
                  <text>PDF</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
          </elementContainer>
        </elementSet>
      </elementSetContainer>
    </collection>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404690">
                <text>1981 April 12-May 14 Students of the Eight: American Masters ca.1910-ca.1960</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="49">
            <name>Subject</name>
            <description>The topic of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404691">
                <text>Exhibition programs</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="39">
            <name>Creator</name>
            <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404692">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404693">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404694">
                <text>1981 April 12-May 17</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="42">
            <name>Format</name>
            <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404695">
                <text>PDF</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="51">
            <name>Type</name>
            <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404696">
                <text>Exhibition Book</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="51516" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="47088">
        <src>https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/files/original/60aa467af24f4e4982e47f226e420352.pdf</src>
        <authentication>cc85474eaffb94edbe1f9d52b7bdc820</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="404681">
                    <text>SORE 5A
ND237
G35P3
1995

£'2

P

R G E S : Self-Portraits

�PAUL GEORGES: Self-Portraits

I

January 22-March 5, 1995
Catalogue Essay by Stanley I Grand

t.S. h.r.LtYLidhA'7
WILKES UNIVERSITY
WILKES-BARRE Pi

Sordoni Art Gallery / Wilkes University / Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania / ^1995

�an

fflljrl!

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

X 4

ill

ARCHIVES

i

'w,

I;

This exhibition reflects the contributions of numerous
individuals and organizations. I would like to express my gratitude
to Paul and Lisette Georges; I have benefited greatly from their
patience, assistance, and hospitality over the years. The same is true
of Professor James M. Dennis.
Yvette Georges Deeton, manager of the Paul Georges Studio,
has been involved with this exhibition from its genesis; her sugges­
tions, comments, and criticisms have been invaluable. 1 also wish
to thank Christopher Deeton, who framed the paintings and
prepared them for shipment; Ken Showell for photographing the
paintings; Arthur Mones for the photograph of Paul Georges; and
William O’Reilly of Salander-O’Reilly Galleries, Inc., for arranging
the transportation of the paintings.
All the paintings in the exhibition are courtesy of SalanderO’Reilly Galleries, Inc., New York City.

John Beck designed the catalogue, whit li wa, primed by
Llewellyn &amp; McKanc, Inc., Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania.
Major support for this publication came front the Richard A
Flonheim Art Fund. Their early and generou, a-si
made this
project possible. This exhibition and publication arc ,upp-&gt;rtd b. _■
grant from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Cour,.:i -:i ti/r A",.
“Paul Georges: Self Portraits” exemplifies the .pirit i/the
Sordoni Art Gallery’s “Contemporary Masters” exhiiu’ivn' I’i.e.e
one-person, mini-retrospectives of older art:,:, fo u on a particu­
lar theme or aspect of a life long commitment to making ar:.
Despite the vagaries of critical and popular support, the : artist.
have persisted in following their own visions. The', have remained
productive during lean times. They have created an impressive body
of work. They have earned the respect of their fellow artist- Paul
Georges is one of them.
-S1 G

[ J

■Lt |

ft
1

' c

I?

T J

VW
kt

Paul Georges, New York City, December 12,1994

�I

I.k designed the catalogue, which was printed by
IcKane, Inc., Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania.
pport for this publication came from the Richard A.
Fund. Their early and generous assistance made this
le. This exhibition and publication are supported by a
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Council on the Ans.
oiges: Self Portraits” exemplifies the spirit of the
Gallery’s “Contemporary Masters” exhibitions. These
ini-retrospectives of older artists focus on a particuspect of a life-long commitment to making art.
garies of critical and popular support, these artists
in following their own visions. They have remained
ring lean times. They have created an impressive body
have earned the respect of their fellow artists. Paul
: of them.
—S I G

Paul Georges, New York City, December 12,1994

c.

�PAUL GEORGES : Self-Portraits
Stanley I Grand

TTn a 1969 interview, Paul Georges recalled that a close encounter
I with death during World War II freed him to become an
JL artist.1 Surviving an enemy attack that left many of his friends
and comrades dead and realizing that he too “should have been
killed,” Georges “just assumed from then on I was free but I didn’t
know how to act on that basis, I didn’t know how to act as a free
man.”2 After his discharge from the Army, Georges acted on his
battlefront epiphany by becoming a painter.
Becoming an artist required that he discover his own means of
expression. The “Triumph of American Painting,” as Irving Sandler
called the success of the original New York School painters, was a
mixed blessing for younger artists like Georges who began showing
in the mid-1950s. Georges has observed that
Abstract Expressionism for me represented freedom in the early 50s and
those early painters were heroes, but it seemed complete to me so I had to
change. Those painters who continued in that style seemed like false painters?

Now seventy-one years old, Georges has been painting self­
portraits since the 1940s. Looking at the works in this exhibition,
which span five decades, one
, „is .struck
.
cby- Georges
- ’ inventiveness: he
refuses to adopt a narrow (■'•••
efimtion of the self-portrait. Instead, his
self-portraits freely incorporate and combine narrative, landscape,
&gt;
interior, still-life, portraiture, and allegorical elements to produce paint­
ings that transcend mere likeness. As Carter Ratcliff noted in 1983:

The ease with which Georges moves across boundaries, the apparent
insouciance with which he leaps from category to category, has taken on,
over the years, an additional weight of meaning. The very' nature of his art,
the wide reach of his style, begins to look like an allegory of the freedom a
painter is able to claim if only the will to do so is present.’
Georges’ initial experiments with a modernist vocabulary are
reflected in Self-Portrait, c. 1946-47 (Figure 1) and Untitled (Artist
with Palette and Brush), c. 1949 (Figure 2). In Self-Portrait Georges,
who studied with Hans Hofmann in 1947, uses a “push and pull”
of colors to establish the picture plane. Painted in Paris while
Georges was a student at the Atelier Fernand Leger, Untitled (Artist
with Palette and Brush) shows the artist in a shallow, flattened space.
The face, which combines three-quarter and frontal views, is clearly
indebted to Picasso. Color plays a minimal role; indeed the linear
quality of the work is more akin to drawing than to painting.
Despite the Cubist style, which minimizes the likeness of the
person portrayed, the prominent bulbous nose clearly belongs to
Georges and allows us to see the painting as a self-portrait.
In 1952, Georges and his wife Lisette, the daughter ofphotographer Erwin Blumenfeld, left Paris for New York City, where they
rented an apartment on 8th Street, in the heart of the art world. He

was twenty-nine years old.
In New York, Georges experimented with a number of differ­
ent styles as he replaced his Cubist with a more plastic manner.

Early critics including Frank O’Hara (1954) and Parker Tyler
(1955), who noted his “protean way of painting,” commented on
his ability to work simultaneously in several different styles?
Reviewing an early solo exhibition, Laverne George (1955) obser
that “The surprising thing about this range of period styles is tha
however much on first glance one would think he’d stumbled on
group show, after a while a single personality can be felt behind I
uninhibited diversity.”6
Recalling these early years, Georges wrote as follows:
I did not search for a style, that is why my paintings were, and are, so
disparate. I wanted to be able to speak in the language of painting. In
order to do so, I had to accept painting’s limitations, which are also, as
Georges Braque said, its strengths. Accepting the limitations of painting
allows me to be free?

Georges’ maturation as an artist coincided with a profound
change in his personal life. The war and subsequent art training
had extended his apprenticeship well beyond early adulthood. He
and Lisette had put off starting a family, but within weeks of his
thirtieth birthday in 1953, Lisette became pregnant. Seeing in his
wife’s fecund form a new ideal of feminine beauty, Georges paint
what he has called his first “realistic” painting: Pregnant Lisette, 1'.
(not in exhibition). Georges quickly and dramatically explored th
potential of his new realist style in Self-Portrait Green, 1955 (Figure 3).
Self-Portrait Green signals Georges’ new freedom to step beyo
the limitations of a single style and to draw inspiration from the
greater tradition of Western painting. Georges’ “return to tradi­
tion,” however, reflected his assimilation of Abstract Expression­
ism. As Fairfield Porter wrote in 1961:

For all of its peculiarity, “American-type” painting contains within itsel
just as Impressionism did, a sort of assimilation of tradition. This assim
tion of tradition comes about through a reaction with the deepest, most
inexpressible force of tradition, and it creates a new artistic capital. In st
an artistic capital a significant conservative “return to tradition” can oct

�kails

cross boundaries, the apparent
category to category, has taken on,
f meaning. The very nature of his art,
ook like an allegory of the freedom a
1 to do so is present.4

with a modernist vocabulary are
' (Figure 1) and Untitled (Artist
gure 2). In Self-Portrait Geoiges,
in 1947, uses a “push and pull”
&gt;lane. Painted in Paris while
er Fernand Leger, Untitled (Artist
irtist in a shallow, flattened space,
uarter and frontal views, is clearly
minimal role; indeed the linear
o drawing than to painting,
inimizes the likeness of the
bulbous nose clearly belongs to
minting as a self-portrait.
e Lisette, the daughter of photogis for New York City, where they
, in the heart of the art world. He
mented with a number of dififert with a more plastic manner.

Early critics including Frank O’Hara (1954) and Parker Tyler
(1955), who noted his “protean way of painting,” commented on
his ability to work simultaneously in several different styles.5
Reviewing an early solo exhibition, Laverne George (1955) observed
that “The surprising thing about this range of period styles is that
however much on first glance one would think he’d stumbled on a
group show, after a while a single personality can be felt behind the
uninhibited diversity.”6
Recalling these early years, Georges wrote as follows:

Georges’ paintings represent such a return. But tradition is available to
him, here in New York, because it was first assimilated by the New York
School, and the form in which it is available is characteristic of this
abstract school.8

In Self-Portrait Green, the artist contemplates a canvas. The
“tough guy” pose, with the thumb of the left hand hooked over the
belt, contrasts with the sensitivity of the face. Although the front of
the painting that he studies is not visible to the viewer, one can
infer from the notation “TOP” on the stretcher that the work is
I did not search for a style, that is why my paintings were, and are, so
either non-objective or that the stretcher once held a non-objective
disparate. I wanted to be able to speak in the language of painting. In
painting. The back of the canvas and its placement in the composi­
order to do so, I had to accept painting’s limitations, which are also, as
tion recall such well-known works as Velazquez’s Las Mininas
Geoiges Braque said, its strengths. Accepting the limitations of painting
(1656), Goya’s Self-Portrait Painting in the Studio (1785) and The
allows me to be free.7
Family of Charles IV, with Goya Painting Them (1800-01), or Cezanne’s
Georges’ maturation as an artist coincided with a profound
Self-Portrait with Palette and Easel (c. 1885-87). The dark tonalities
change in his personal life. The war and subsequent art training
and loose expressive brushwork also recall Velazquez and Goya,
had extended his apprenticeship well beyond early adulthood. He
while the lighting, which comes from the upper left, evokes Rem­
and Lisette had put off starting a family, but within weeks of his
brandt’s divine light.
thirtieth birthday in 1953, Lisette became pregnant. Seeing in his
Reflecting an unmistakably modern sensibility, however,
wife’s fecund form a new ideal of feminine beauty, Georges painted Geoiges flattened the picture in several ways. He turned the stretcher
what he has called his first “realistic” painting: Pregnant Lisette, 1954 almost parallel to the picture plane to create a shallow space and
counter any tendency to perspectival recession. His painterly
(not in exhibition). Georges quickly and dramatically explored the
technique, which blurs figure-ground relationships, further flattens
potential of his new realist style in Self-Portrait Green, 1955 (Figure 3).
Self-Portrait Green signals Georges’ new freedom to step beyond the picture. Finally, he uses letters and words to emphasize the
surface, as in the Synthetic Cubism of Picasso and Braque.
the limitations of a single style and to draw inspiration from the
The words, however, should not be read solely as a formal
greater tradition of Western painting. Georges’ “return to tradi­
device. The inclusion of the artist’s name, home address (231 East
tion,” however, reflected his assimilation of Abstract Expression­
11th Street in New York), and hanging notation indicate that the
ism. As Fairfield Porter wrote in 1961:
painter is an active member of the New York art community whose
works are included in contemporary exhibitions. Indeed, Georges
For all of its peculiarity, “American-type” painting contains within itself,
had begun to receive confirmation of his status as an artist. Clem­
just as Impressionism did, a sort of assimilation of tradition. This assimila­
ent Greenberg, for example, had included him in “Emerging
tion of tradition comes about through a reaction with the deepest, most
inexpressible force of tradition, and it creates a new artistic capital. In such Talent,” an important group exhibition at the Kootz Gallery in
“significant1 consemuv7“return to tradition” can occur. January 1954, and the Hansa Gallery had scheduled his first onean artistic capital a &lt; „

�man exhibition in New York for November. Althoug h
tion never took place-Georges removed his pain mgs fro
gallery prior to the opening-Frank O’Hara saw them an ,
cally gave Georges’ non-exhibition a favorable review
In the years following the abortive Hansa Gafiery experie ’
Georges continued to refine his naturalistic style. Like Cour e
The Painter’s Studio: A RealAllegoiy Summing up Seven Years oj My
Life as an Artist (1854-55), with which it shares many similarities,
Georges’ Artist, Lisette and Paulette in Studio, 1956 (Figure 4) is a reallife allegory that summarizes a stage in his aesthetic development.
One of his largest paintings to date, Artist, Lisette and Paulette
shows a new confidence and^rawto. Georges has divided the
composition into three quasi-equal parts that represent the artist­
creator, the work of art, and the artist’s inspiration. Much as the
overall warm tonality (obtained by using a Maroger medium)
unifies the work, the tripartite composition proclaims the unity of
his life and art and the equivalence of the generative and imaginative.
On the left stands Paulette, Georges’ two-year-old daughter,
whose name is the diminutive and feminine version of his own.
She raises her left hand to her mouth; her right hand rests lightly
on her father’s arm. This touch, combined with a continuous,
encompassing contour line that flows from Georges’ head and
shoulder links her unmistakably to her father. Fie is her creator just
as he is about to create a work of art.
Georges himself is seated. His right hand, holding a piece of
charcoal, makes the transition from the left to the composition’s
center. The painting portrays the moment before creation, before
he begins to draw, in order to emphasize the mental over the
manual activity. Paulette’s reflexive gesture of surprise pays witness
to the miracle in progress. The isolated placement of the artist’s
hand just above the center of the canvas underscores that the
miracle can become tangible only through the intercession of the
artist.
On the right, Lisette, nude, sits on an elevated platform
covered with drapery that cascades from the corner above her head.

Mother of his child and muse to his art, she rests her crossedl ■
on a box or crate as she looks at her husband and child. pIc.£
a modicum of modesty, a light cloth crosses one thigh. Lis^f
nudity contrasts with the geometric forms of the easel and dra^:paper and suggests the familiar nature-culture, sensual-inteUectv-:

dichotomy.
In 1956, the year preceding the completion of/frw,
Paulette, Georges published “A Painter Looks at a) the Nude,b)
Corot” in which he discussed the difficulties in painting a nude
Devious means are required to render her il one wants to show j nuk
truly. She must be free in space, she must belong to it, she must relate to
it. If one thinks of her as an objec t all is lost, il one does not thin! of l&gt;s
as an object all is lost. There is the same contradiction in paintingo!,:.
kind as there is in woman herself. If one paints the relations one dotsr i
have the essence, and if one paints the thing the essence eludes you.’1

Georges’ insistence that the nude must be both “free in spits'
and “must belong to it” became his major formal concern. Ht
wanted neither to create “allover” Abstract Expressionist space, in
which the figure-ground relationship blurred, nor traditional
paintings, in which the figure and ground were clearly distinct an'
separate. Rather he wanted to combine both movement and fom
in an ambiguous, constantly changing “orbital" relationship.
In orbital space, the forms circle around each other like
satellites in constantly changing trajectories; the relationship
between forms remains ambiguous, open and “capable of charge
depending on how you see it.”11 Orbital space is the opposite or
perspectival space, which locates forms in rational, measurable.
s»tic&gt; and closed pictorial relationships.
Self-Portrait, 1959 (Figure 5), which was shown in his l’j
portrait exhibition at the Great Jones Gallery, demonstrate! —
space. Here the artist, holding a brush, sits on a bentwood co­
Using a loaded brush and painting wet-into-wet in the
manner, Georges subordinates details to create a more genei^,
’;5p.- „i
r
t &gt;■rather than individualized, self-portrait. Georges’ express-

work and the monochromatic palette create an .
relationship that integrates the figure into the o
one is uncertain where the figure ends and the g
neither figure nor ground loses its identity.
For Georges, grappling with the contradict
picture surface and the picture plane, between si
between finite form and expressive movement I
just the classic formal problem of modernism.'
dictions that he encountered in attempting to c
echoed the difficulties inherent in trying to live
In the early 1960s, Georges made the trans
value painting to color. This change is dramatn
compares Standing Self-Portrait tn Studio, 1959 (
Self-Portrait, 1962-63 (Figure 7), One notes furl
learned to animate his figure in the latter comp
contrapposto and by imparting a sense of mon
artjst suddenly looks up.'

As Georges perfected his formal skills, he
preoccupied with the question:

“Formal for what?” I say to myself. ... It seems to :
to be formal, is to say something. If you have noth)
we got where we are.”12
In Georges’ mind formal innovation had,
replaced content:
Ail the “isms” of the 20th century—Futurism, Absti
as well as Pop and Op An fare) rea]]y about prwei,
k,™-™ m,.
— .i,.-,
i,.—__inalienator
­
become the ends.... m
When
this happens

There has to be some urgent need.... I think none
were trying to speak about our needs. That’s what
until about a hundred jo
years ago?’

�■

Mother of his child and muse to his art, she rests her crossed le
on a box or crate as she looks at her husband and child. Provmf
a modicum of modesty, a light cloth crosses one thigh. Lisette’s"8
nuditv contrasts with the geometric forms of the easel a nd drawin
paper’and suggests the familiar nature-culture, sensual-intellectUal8

dichotomy.
In 1956, the year preceding the completion ofArtist, Lisette and
Parity Georges published “A Painter Looks at a) the Nude, b)
1- Corot” in which he discussed the difficulties in painting a nude:
Devious means are required to render her if one wants to show a nude
truly. She must be free in space, she must belong to it, she must relate to
it If one thinks of her as an object all is lost, if one does not think of her
as an object all is lost There is the same contradiction in painting of this
kind as there is in woman herself. It one paints the relations one does not
ha® the essence, and if one paints the thing the essence eludes you.10

Georges’ insistence that the nude must be both “free in space”
and “must belong to it” became his major formal concern. He
wanted neither to create “allover” Abstract Expressionist space, in
which the figure-ground relationship blurred, nor traditional
paintings, in which the figure and ground were clearly- distinct and
separate. Rather he wanted to combine both movement and form
tn an ambiguous, constantly changing “orbital” relationship.
In orbital space, the forms circle around each other like
satellites in constandy changing trajectories; the relationship
between forms remains ambiguous, open and “capable of change
depending on. how you see it”i! Orbital space is the opposite of
perspectival space, which locates forms in rational, measurable,
static, and closed pictorial relationships.
his 1960 self
Self-Portrait, 1959 (Figure 5), which was shown in
--------. ­
Gallery, demonstrates orbita
orbital
portrait exhibition at the Great Jones Gallery',
space. Here the artist, holding a brush, sits on a bentwood chair.
Using a loaded brush and painting wet-into-wet in the Venetian
manner, Georges subordinates details to create a more generalize ,
rather than individualized, self-portrait. Georges’ expressive brus -

work and the monochromatic palette create an ambiguous spatial
relationship that integrates the figure into the overall composition:
one is uncertain where the figure ends and the ground begins, yet
neither figure nor ground loses its identity.
For Georges, grappling with the contradiction between the
picture surface and the picture plane, between surface and depth,
between finite form and expressive movement became more than
just the classic formal problem of modernism. The pictorial contra­
dictions that he encountered in attempting to create free paintings
echoed the difficulties inherent in trying to live as a free man.
In the early 1960s, Georges made the transition from tonal or
value painting to color. This change is dramatically apparent if one
compares Standing Self-Portrait in Studio, 1959 (Figure 6) with Seated
Self-Portrait, 1962-63 (Figure 7). One notes further how Georges has
learned to animate his figure in the latter composition by means of
contrapposto and by' imparting a sense of momentariness, as the
artist suddenly looks up.
As Georges perfected his formal skills, he became increasingly
preoccupied with the question:

“Formal for what?” I say to myself.... It seems to me the only reason . .
to be formal, is to say something. If you have nothing to say, that’s how
we got where we are.”12
In Georges’ mind formal innovation had, unfortunately,
replaced content:
All the “isms” of the 20th century—Futurism, Abstract Expressionism ...
as well as Pop and Op Art [are] really about process.... The means have
become the ends.. .. When this happens alienation and cynicism set in.
There has to be some urgent need.... I think none of us are artists unless
we’re trying to speak about our needs. That’s what art has been about...
until about a hundred years ago.14

By the end of the 1960s, Georges felt an “urgent need” to
address some of the dynamic events that characterized that turbu­
lent decade. One such painting is My Kent State, 1970-71 (Figure 10).
As the American military presence in Viet Nam expanded
during the 1960s, so did the domestic antiwar movement. When
President Nixon ordered the invasion of Cambodia in the spring of
1970, his actions provoked widespread protests, including one at
Kent State University, which ended tragically on May 4, when Ohio
National Guardsmen fired on a group of students, killing four and
wounding nine.
Georges expressed his outrage in a number of paintings. In Aly
Kent State, many figures are compressed into a shallow space,
suggesting crush and panic, chaos and fright Georges himself
appears in the center of the composition, kneeling and restraining
his muse, who attempts to flee. The artist and muse are surrounded
by National Guardsmen, clouds of tear gas, and on the ground, the
foreshortened body of a dead student whose blood merges with the
painted red border. The artist’s pose was appropriated or transposed
from a photograph by John P. Filo that appeared in The Neto York
Times on May 5, 1970. One of the best known and most powerful
photographs of the 1970s, it depicts an anguished young woman
kneeling beside a slain student. On the painting’s right, Georges has
represented Richard Nixon and Vice President Spiro Agnew.
Although NLxon turns away from the violence, his blood-covered
hands emphasize his guile
Georges, of course, is not unique among modern artists in
responding to shocking or tragic contemporary' events. Indeed, My
Kent State belongs to a long tradition of particularized protest
paintings that include Goya’s Third ofMay, 1808 (1814), Gericault’s
The Raft of the Medusa (1819), Manet’s The Execution ofMaximillian
(1868), Ben Shahn’s The Passion ofSacco and Vanzetti (1931-32), and
Picasso’s Guernica (1937). The closest parallel, however, is with
Philip Evergood’s An American Tragedy (1937), which commemo­
rates a 1937 Memorial Day clash between strikers and police at the
Republic Steel Company mill in Gary, Indiana. Both works are

�•

’«•■ * •□■Ml

responses to specific incidents. Both artists painted themselves; as
participants in the events, although neither had been at the scene
Both artists used news photographs in their compositions, u
ous compositional similarities exist as well, most particularly the
centralized man and woman, the massed agents of authority, and
the placement of the dead. Finally, both use an idealized image of
woman. For Evergood, woman is not only a protector of man, but
also a symbol of new life amidst the chaos, repression, and death.
Georges’ muse similarly represents the powers of creation, if not
procreation.
Afi' Kent State should not be read simply as a particularized
protest. Rather, Georges viewed the killings at Kent State as a
massive attack on American civic freedoms. The constitutional
rights of citizens to speak freely, to assemble peacefully, to petition
their government, to receive a fair trial (instead of a summary
execution), and to avoid involuntary servitude (the draft) seemed to
have died in a fusillade. Georges, for whom freedom is the primary
value, felt that he must condemn the government repression.
In addition to speaking out against political repression,
Georges also challenged the prevailing critical viewpoint that
considered figurative art inferior to abstract art. As part of his
rebellion against a new “mainstream” orthodoxy, he vigorously
sought to expand the exhibition opportunities for representational
artists through his activities with the Alliance of Figurative Artists,
which he helped to found in February 1969. Modeled on the
Eighth-Street Club, which Geoiges had frequented in the early
1950s, the Alliance provided a Friday-evening forum where artists
could present work, lecture, receive critical feedback, and partici­
pate in panel discussions.
During the late 1960s and early 1970s, many of the figurative
artists active in the Alliance met at the Cedar Tavern, which was
once the favorite hangout of the first generation New York School
artists. Georges portrayed several of the new regulars in Cedar
Tavern, 1973-74 (Figure 14). Seated at the table, clockwise from the
lower left corner, are Georges (wearing a grey sweater with leather
elbow patches), Sam Thurston, Anthony Santuoso, and Marty

Pachek. Standing between Pachek and Paul Resika (bearded and
wearing a red sweater), Camille (Carmella) Nandanici serves coff=
Continuing around the table are Aristodimos Kaldis (an artist
Georges met in 1947), an unidentified young woman, and Jim
Wilson. Behind the table, Howard Kalish and Jacob (Jack) Silberman are seated at the bar. The tiny head to the right represents
Mike Berg. Anthony Siani (who along with Silberman sued Genre.
for libel alleging that he had depicted them as “violent criminals’
in the Mugging of the Muse [1972-74, not in exhibition]) appears
standing directly above the waitress’s tray.
Interior at Walker, 1972 (Figure 11) and SelfPortrait with
Cabinet, 1972-74 (Figure 13) document two domestic views. In the
first, the artist embraces his,wife Lisette. Th*. ,e^n8 is the family’s
loft, purchased in 1970, on Walker Street in the Tribeca area of
Manhattan. The second shows the artist leaning against a china
cabinet that is still to be seen in the loft’s dining area. Together
these paintings celebrate, on one level, the painter’s attainment of
financial security for the first time in his life.
The following year, 1973, Georges turned fifty and began
Fantasy About Freedom #/, 1973-76 (Figure 15). Here we see the
somewhat overweight, middle-aged artist gamboling on the heath
with three young women who, like the artist, have abandoned their
bathing suits. This lyrical pastoral, a combination of personal
daydream and art historical references, recalls Georges’ earlier
paintings on the theme of the Three Graces.
Georges frequently employs caricature as an essential visual
device. The element of humor associated with caricature gives a
droll cast to the image, prevents it from becoming excessively
earnest, and in consequence, strengthens its aesthetic power. E. H.
Gombrich observed that “The invention of portrait caricature
presupposes the theoretical discovery of the difference between
likeness and equivalence.”15 Georges understands this difference
completely. By means of isolation, generalization, simplified
exaggeration, caricature schematizes details and removes them
the realm of the particular to the allegorical. Thus caricature
changes Georges’ Fantasy from a study of the artist’s physio?150®'

or character into a more generalized image of the attist libera
from the restraints of propriety and decotum. Or. as Richard
Brilliant has noted, the role assumed by the artist tends to “d
place” rather than “define" the character of the individual.
Typically, Georges’ self-portraits depict the artist in a po
manner of affirmative freedom. They are not preoccupied wii
analysis, introspection, or despair. Art is his weapon in rhe d&lt;
of a civilization whose primary virtue is freedom Although 1
holds these values sincerely, his use of caricature gives the co:
tion an irreverent, unmistakably modern feeling.
In formal terms, Fantasy is constructed to demonstrate [
rial freedom: the vast sky above the low horizon creates a lev
feeling because, according to Georges, “everything above the

horizon line opens up."1 (His use of a low horizon is seen it
Portrait in Studio, 1982 [Figure 16] as well.) This not only cre&lt;
“architecture of openness," but also liberates the figures by si
etting them against the sky.1 Similar effects are found in Rei
sance and Baroque illusionist ic. ceilings.
The placement of the small figure on the left, in an indi
nate space, also demonstrates pictorial freedom. Georges has
observed that in Bruegel’s Hunter:, in the Sn»w(l565):

You see large figures on the left moving over the hill, and you see 1:
figures at the bottom right. To gel to these little figures you have to
down instead of up. Normally in perspective, something that’s beh
something else is above it-a closer chair is lower, the further one n
higher—but paintings have to resolve themselves on the wall. If yoc
what is nearer up high, you &lt; an oppose the rule at the same time a
obeying it.''

By situating the smaller figure to the left and below the
cavorting nudes, the artist counters any tendency toward per
tival recession, as it is countered in the Bruegel. Instead ofgr
°ack
the eye is drawn down, underscoring the mteg

Pp™^n°_“fu^acc'r.
Representative of his mature self-portraits of the artist-;
artist, Self-Portrait in the Studio, c. 1983 (Figure 17) portrays C

’

�ek. Standing between Pachek and Paul Resika (bearded and
ing a red sweater), Camille (Carmella) Nandanici serves coffe
inuing around the table are Aristodimos Kaldis (an artist e'
ges met in 1947), an unidentified young woman, and Jim
,n. Behind the table, Howard Kalish and Jacob (Jack) Silberare seated at the bar. The tiny head to the right represents
Berg. Anthony Siani (who along with Silberman sued Geor5,
”X«
bel alleging that he had depicted them as “violent criminals”
.‘Mugging of the Muse [1972-74, not in exhibition]) appears
ing directly above the waitress’s tray.
Interior at Walker, 1972 (Figure 11) and Self-Portrait with
.’et, 1972-74 (Figure 13) document two domestic views. In the
the artist embraces his wife Lisette. The setting is the family’s
mrchased in 1970, on Walker Street in the Tribeca area of
rattan. The second shows the artist leaning against a china
et that is still to be seen in the loft’s dining area. Together
paintings celebrate, on one level, the painter’s attainment of
rial security for the first time in his life.
The following year, 1973, Georges turned fifty and began
y About Freedom #1, 1973-76 (Figure 15). Here we see the
vhat overweight, middle-aged artist gamboling on the beach
hree young women who, like the artist, have abandoned their
ig suits. This lyrical pastoral, a combination of personal
ram and art historical references, recalls Georges’ earlier
ngs on the theme of the Three Graces.
Georges frequently employs caricature as an essential visual
. The element of humor associated with caricature gives a
:ast to the image, prevents it from becoming excessively
t, and in consequence, strengthens its aesthetic power. E. H.
rich observed that “The invention of portrait caricature
&gt;poses the theoretical discovery of the difference between
ss and equivalence.”15 Georges understands this difference
etely.By means of isolation, generalization, simplification, or
ration, caricature schematizes details and removes them frorn

study of the artist’s physiognomy

or character into a more generalized image of the artist liberated
from the restraints of propriety and decorum. Or, as Richard
Brilliant has noted,, the role assumed by the artist tends to “dis­
place” rather than “define” the character of the individual.16
Typically, Georges’ self-portraits depict the artist in a positive
manner of affirmative freedom. They are not preoccupied with selfanalysis, introspection, or despair. Art is his weapon in the defense
of a civilization whose primary virtue is freedom. Although he
holds these values sincerely, his use of caricature gives t'the composition an irreverent, unmistakably modern feeling.
In formal terms, Fantasy is constructed to demonstrate picto­
rial freedom: the vast sky above the low horizon creates a levitous
feeling because, according to Georges, “everything above the
horizon line opens up/•”17 (His use of a low horizon is seen in SelfPortrait in Studio, 1982 [Figure 16] as well.) This not only creates an
“architecture of openness,” but also liberates the figures by silhou­
etting them against the sky.17 Similar effects are found in Renais­
sance and Baroque illusionistic ceilings.
The placement of the small figure on the left, in an indetermi­
nate space, also demonstrates pictorial freedom. Geoiges has
observed that in Bruegel’s Hunters in the Snow (1565):

You see large figures on the left moving over the hill, and you see little
figures at the bottom right. To get to these little figures you have to go
down instead of up. Normally in perspective, something that’s behind
something else is above it—a closer chair is lower, the further one is
higher—but paintings have to resolve themselves on the wall. If you place
what is nearer up high, you can oppose the rule at the same time as
obeying it.1’
By situating the smaller figure to the left and below the
cavorting nudes, the artist counters any tendency toward perspectival recession, as it is countered in the Bruegel. Instead of going
back in space, the eye is drawn down, underscoring the integrity of
the painting’s surface.
Representative of his mature self-portraits of the artist-asres

wearing clean, if casual, clothing. His brush appears to touch one
of his own paintings, seen in reverse, hanging on the wall behind
the artist. This action compresses and contradicts the illusion of
three-dimensionality and creates a figure-ground ambiguity that
serves to flatten the picture. The three smaller paintings on the wall
behind the artist are reverse images of color reproductions-Balthus’
The Room (1952-54), Mantegna’s Judith and Holofemts (c. 1495), and
Velazquez’s Pope Innocent X (1650)—that hang in Georges’ studio.
While “true” to optical reality, the reproductions appear reversed
because Georges paints his self-portraits by looking in a mirror and
not from photographs.
In his self-portraits, Georges consistently depicts himself in
casual attire. In part this is verisimilitude: he paints in old, casual
clothing (note the longevity of the sweater that appears in Standing’
Self-Portrait in Studio, 1959 (Figure 6], Seated Self-Portrait, 1962-63
[Figure 7], and Cedar Tavern, 1973-74 [Figure 14]). By refusing to
adopt the sartorial trappings of the middle class (that is the busi­
ness suit), Georges emphasizes his position as an outsider, free to
do what he wants, which in his case is to be an artist. Unconcerned
with the conventions of dignity and decorum, he is free to paint
himself naked (Figure 15), or to be what Sidney Ttllim once called
him: a “sentimental vulgarian.”20
The image of the gentleman-artist that Georges emphatically
rejects evolved over five centuries. Discussing Velazquez’s Las
Meninas in the Prado, for example, Jonathan Brown has emphasized
the work’s “transcendent social implications-the condition of
painting as a liberal, noble art and thus of painters as artists
entitled to enjoy the privileges of high social status.”21 Likewise in
nineteenth-century' France: Henri Fantin-Latour’s well-known
Portrait of Edouard Manet (by 1867) in the Art Institute of Chicago,
for example, seems more a likeness of a bourgeois dandy than of a
prominent member of the avant-garde.
Georges readily adopts the romantic image of the bohemian
artist as a schema of freedom. He expects the viewer to recognize
the social convention of the bohemian artist and to understand
that image’s connotations of freedom. He is not concerned with

�the “originality” of the schema, but rather in its ability to convey a
I16 m
ln\he Studio, 1989-90 (Figure 18) shows the artist standing
half of
the doorway of his Normandy studio. A strong light falls on ha., his face while shadow obscures the rest. The dark, almost gloomy
interior contrasts with the sunny courtyard much as the contem­
plative artist differs from the active workman outside. Although
holding a brush, he is not painting. Slightly behind the artist,
beneath a picture hanging on the wall, a dog waits patiently on the
floor. Further back, a still life of rag, bowl, and bottles sits on a
worktable. At the very rear of the studio, a ladder leans against the
wall next to a large, unfinished painting.
Color plays a fundamental role in this work by maintaining
the integrity of the surface and, as such, reflects his early training
with Hans Hofmann. Unlike those who view the picture surface as
a kind of window onto the world, Hofmann saw the surface as a
dynamic equilibrium of competing forces that “push and pull”
against each other. In this work, the warm colors appear to push
outward or advance while the cool colors recede or pull back. This
equipose produces an illusion of space or depth by means of color
rather than by perspective.
Georges’ view of color recalls Maurice Denis’ famous dictum,
at the turn of the century, that “a picture-before being a war-horse,
a nude woman, or some sort of anecdote—is essentially a surface
covered with colours arranged in a certain order.”22 Georges believes
that color is the one thing that an artist can put on the canvas that
is not “illusion.” He notes that although the painter can capture
the exact hue of a sock or shirt, he can neither recreate threedimensional space nor introduce motion onto a two-dimensional
surface. Consequently when perspective, value (light and dark), or
movement are used to “solve” a painting, the result invariably’
looks “fake.”
Georges obviously does not forbid illusion; however, he
subordinates perspective to color. Red, for example, counteracts the
recession of the strong diagonal orthogonals. The juxtaposition of

small areas of red near the bottom of the painting with a larger on.
above also creates a kind of reverse perspective. If one were to draw
imaginary lines from the sandals to the top and bottom edges of
the red painting in the “background,” the lines would diverge, or
open up, instead of converging or closing dow n. This lateral
1. For an extensive discussion ol the issue &gt; raised tn this tmv.sce in,
movement, created by color on the surface, counterbalances lineal "Allegories of Freedom tn the Paintings of Patti Georges” (Ph i). T,.
■.
University of Wisconsin-Madison. 1993).
recession and illusionist ic space.
Multiple vanishing points and horizon lines further exacer­
2. Interview with Karl Fortess, October 1'9,» Archives of Amrmun Ar'
bate the sense of ambiguity in the picture. Indeed it is difficult to
locate the horizon. We would expect a high horizon line in a
3. Paul Georges to author, December 12, 1994.
standing self-portrait like In the Studio since the horizon line
4. Carter Ratcliff, “Paul Georges,"/KAI fcwnal, Fall 1983, p 7.
corresponds to the artist’s eye level. The horizon line, however, is
neither constant, predictable, nor imitative of reality.
5. F.O’H. [Frank O’Hara), "Paul Georges,November 1954, P. ‘ ■
Georges also uses pastage, the technique associated with
P.F. [Parker Tyler|, “Paul Geoijej,” Art New,, November 1955, p. 49.
Cezanne and Analytical Cubism, to eliminate the illusion of plana6. Laverne George, “Paul Georges," Arts .Magazine, December 1955, p. 5U
recession and to create spatial ambiguity. In In the Studio, aquama­
rine combines the artist’s figure and the blue painting on the wall
7. Paul Georges to author, January 3, 1995.
“behind” into a single shape that simultaneously emphasizes the
surface and creates Georges’ ambiguous “orbital space."
8. Fairfield Porter, “Art, George,; [he Nature of the Am ,’r. Tradition The
Throughout his career, which began professionally in the late Nation, February 11. 1961, p 128. Reprinted tn Fairfield Porter An m Its Oi/n
1940s, Georges has returned again and again to the subject of the Terms: Selected Cntin.m /9.;s t'r/s, editt-: by I'm !■•,,&gt;■.&gt;■ Dua.u . Ci»
f
artist working in his studio. Picasso’s observation that “One’s work Taplinger, 1979), p. 130.
is sort of a diary”25 is particularly true of Georges,
9. F.O’H., “Pau! Georges,” p. 61.

NOTES

I always work.... Even if I don’t like what I do, 1 don’t judge it.... 1 i“;’
do it and put it away.25

He is not plagued by self-doubt, cynicism, or nihilism as he
strives to live as a free man through art. In his self-portraits,
Georges asserts the primacy of the individual in a depersonalized
industrial society and, further, that freedom cannot exist without
individual responsibility. Never the cool, aloofflaneur observing
the world go by, Georges engages and transforms his subjects h}
means of a sophisticated formal vocabulary. His passionate ptetorial journal records the progress of a private man made public-

10. Paul Georges, “A Painter Looks itj)Thc Nude, b) Corot,’’ An
November 1956, p. 40.
11. Ibid.

L

p. I1
1
Fan
Nov

1

Bra
Rtvt
I Nr

2
I?,;;
2
(Prr
2
I-i
194

12. Paul Georges, ---------moderator-----------------of
here Ar* We-----Kga.'1 .a r
pare,
d . --------- ---February 19,1971 at theAlhar.ce of Figurati.-.-Anr.ts. NrwYork Cny
13. Quoted in Diane Cochrane, “Pau! Georges: Tnr Object 1; the Sub
American Artist, September 1974, p. 59.

14. Ibid.

2

�m of the painting with a larger on
se perspective. If one were to draw
to the top and bottom edges of
ind,” the lines would diverge or
r closing down. This lateral
he surface, counterbalances lineal

nd horizon lines further exacere picture. Indeed it is difficult to
lect a high horizon line in a
'India since the horizon line
el. The horizon line, however, is
imitative of reality.
i technique associated with
to eliminate the illusion of planar
biguity. In In the Studio, aquamand the blue painting on the wall
simultaneously emphasizes the
guous ‘"orbital space.”
h began professionally in the late
i and again to the subject of the
so’s observation that “One’s work

NOTES
1. For an extensive discussion of the issues raised in this essay, see my
“Allegories of Freedom in the Paintings of Paul Georges” (Ph.D. dissertation,
University of Wisconsin-Madison, 1993).
2. Interview with Karl Fortess, October 1969. Archives of American Art.

4. Carter Ratcliff, “Paul Georges," ACM Journal, Fall 1983, p. 7.

5. F.O'H. [Frank O’Hara], “Paul Georges,” Art News, November 1954, p. 61.
P.T. [Parker Tyler], “Paul Georges,"Art News, November 1955, p. 49.
6. Laverne George, “Paul Georges,” Aris Magazine, December 1955, p. 50.

7. Paul Georges to author, January 3, 1995.
8. Fairfield Porter, “Art, Georges: The Nature of the Artistic Tradition,” The
f Nation, February 11, 1961, p. 128. Reprinted in Fairfield Porter, Art in Its Own
f Terms: Selected Criticism 1935-1975, edited by Rackstraw Downes (New York:

flinger, 1979), p. 130.
9. F.O'H, “Paul Georges,” p. 61.

I

17. Paul Georges as member of a panel, “Science Fiction, Myth and Fantasy
Fantasy-Moral on the Macabre," held at the Alliance of Figurative Artist- on
November 17, 1978.
18. Ibid.
19. Artist's statement in Hudson River Museum, The World Is Round (Yonkers.
N.Y.: The Hudson River Museum, 1987), p. 25. Paul Georges used the same
Bruegel example to explain Hofmann’s “push and pull” to Larry Rivers. (Larry
Rivers with Arnold Weinstein, What Did 1 Do: The Unauthorized Autohtogr.i-h-,’
[New York: HarperCollins, 1992], pp. 79-80).

20. Sidney Tillim, “Ness- York Exhibitions: The Month in Review,". in.
Magazine, January 1963, p. 42.
21. Jonathan Brown, Images and Ideas in Seventeenth Century Spanish Painting
(Princeton. NJ.: Princeton University Press, 1978), p. 93.

10. Paul Georges, “A Painter Looks at a) The Nude, b) Corot," Art News,

K November 1956, p. 40.

lubt, cynicism, or nihilism as he
gh art. In his self-portraits,
e individual in a depersonalized
at freedom cannot exist without
he cool, aloofflaneur observing
and transforms his subjects by
'ocabulary. His passionate picto
f a private man made public.

16. Richard Brilliant, Portraiture (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1991),
p. 101.

3. Paul Georges to author, December 12, 1994.

true of Georges.
e what I do, I don't judge it.... I just

15. E. H. Gombrich, An and Illusion: A Study in the Psychology oj Pictorial
Representation (Princeton, NJ.: Princeton University Press, Bollingen Paperback.
1969), p. 342.

11. Ibid.
12. Paul Georges, moderator of “Where Are We Noss’?” a panel discussion held
February 19, 1971 at the Alliance of Figurative Artists, New York City.
13. Quoted in Diane Cochrane, “Paul Georges: The Object Is the Subject,

American Artist, September 1974, p. 59.

14. Ibid.

22. Maurice Denis, “Definition du Neo-traditionnisme," published in August,
1890, quoted in George Heard Hamilton, Painlmg and Sculpture in Europe I8SU1940, The Pelican History of Art (New York: Penguin Books. 1972), p. 107.
23. William Rubin, editor, Pablo Picasso: A Retrospective (New York Museum of
Modern Art, 1980), p. 277.

24. Interview with Karl Fortess, October 1969.

������Self-Portrait Green, 1955
oil on linen
483/4 x 43’ /a inches

��4

Artist, Lisette and Paulette in Studio, 1956
Maroger medium on linen
75'/2x 8772 inches

��I
5

Self-Portrait, 1959
oil on linen
25 3A x 313/4 inches

���i

1

gSkir—
i

1

F

4

������&gt;

9

Self-Portrait with Model in Studio. 1967-68
oil on linen
733/b x 81 '^inches

������Painting Self-Portrait, 1972-74
oil on linen
81 x 48 inches

����14

Cedar Tavern, 1973-74
oil on linen
573/4 x 943/4 inches

�Cedar Tavern, 1973-74
oil on linen
573/4x 943/4 inches

����iu

�.

I

�Self-Portrait in the Studio, c. 1983
oil on linen
583/c x 4O'/4 inches

������a tist in residence, Dartmouth College, Hanover, New Hampshire (S
1964 Ar ’ . •
Dartmouth College, Hanover, New Hampshire. Solo exl
S01° Mian Frumkin Gallery, New York (March 31-April 25). Awarded C
B°ck Gold Medal at The Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine Arts “159th

CHRONOLOGY
1923 Paul Gordon Georges born June 15 in Portland, Oregon,t0 E&gt;al’y OstrOW
(d. 1950, born in Russia) and Thomas Theseus Georges (1886-1977, boi&gt;rn in
Greece).
1939 Paints first painting while a student at Lincoln High School, Portland, Oregon.

1941-1942 Works at father’s laundry business in Portland, Oregon.
1942 Attends Oregon State College.
1943-1945 Drafted into the United States Army. Serves as an Infantry Radio
Operator in the Pacific Theater (February 1943-December 1945).

1946 Attends University of Oregon, Eugene, Oregon. Studies with Jack Wilk­
inson, who becomes a lifelong friend and advisor.
1947 Attends Hans Hofmann School, Provincetown, Massachusetts (Summer).
Meets Jane Freilicher, Robert Goodnough, Wolf Kahn, Paul Resika, and Larry
Rivers. Continues studies at the University of Oregon (Fall) and receives Junior
Certificate.
1949 Spends February through April in New York City. Moves to Paris and
lives on Rue de la Bucherie. Exhibits in the Salon de Mais. Attends Academic
de la Grande Chaumiere and then the Atelier Fernand Leger (1949-1952). Meets
Lisette Blumenfeld, daughter of photographer Erwin Blumenfeld (December).
1950 Marries Lisette Blumenfeld in Cambridge, England (January 23). Moves to
La Frette, a small town outside Paris, where he rents a house formerly occupied
by the painter Albert Marquet. Returns to the United States (September) after
his mother dies. Returns to France (December).

1952 Travels to Italy, visits Florence, Venice, Arezzo, and Ravenna. Leaves France
and moves to New York City (March). Rents a loft at 41 East 8th Street (1952-54),
1954 Clement Greenberg includes Georges in “Emerging Talent,” Kootz Gallery

(November 8-27). (Although Georges cancels exhibition, review by Rank
O Hara appears in Art News [November 1954].)
y
nK

1955 Meets John Bernard Myers; First New York solo exhibition: Tibor de Naev
Gallery New York (October 25-November 12). Designs stage scenery for 0
Tennessee Williams plays produced at Lake Hopatcong, New Jersey, by Herbert
Maches.
1956 Visits Oregon in conjunction with solo exhibition at Reed College Faculty
Lounge, Portland, (July) and solo exhibition at University of Oregon, Eugene'
Publishes “A Painter Looks at a) The Nude, b) Corot” in Art News (Novembm
Fairfield Porter gives Maroger medium to Georges.

1957 Solo exhibition: Tibor de Nagy Gallery, New York (April 23-May 11),
Summers at Northwest Woods, Sag Harbor. Franz Kline gives his color oil
paints to Georges.
1958 Summers at Poxabogue, Long Island. Solo exhibition: The Zabriskie
Gallery, New York (December 8-January 3, 1959).
1959 Family summers at Poxabogue, Long Island. Moves to 9 West 16th Street

1960 Solo exhibition: Great Jones Gallery, New York (February 23-March 13).
Summers at Martha’s Vineyard, Massachusetts. Moves to 645 Broadway (Fall).
Participates in “The Question of the Future [The Fifth International Hallmark
Art Award Exhibition],” Wildenstein Gallery, New York (October 4-29);
receives Purchase Award. Daughter Yvette born (November 13).

1961 Awarded Longview Foundation Fellowship Purchase Award. Solo Exhibi­
tion: Great Jones Gallery, New York (January 23-February 19). Visiting
Professor of Art, University of Colorado, Boulder. (January-April). Trip to
Oregon (May). Returns to Sag Harbor, Long Island (July 4). Solo exhibition: Real
College, Pordand, Oregon (c. December). Exhibits in “Annual Exhibition of
Contemporary American Painting,” Whitney Museum of American Art, New York.

1962 Exhibits in Figures: A Show of Current Figure Painting in New York,
Kornblee Gallery, New York (May-June). Summers at Sag Harbor, Long Ishnd
Solo Exhibition: Allan Frumkin Gallery, New York (November 6-Decembt: 11
Purchases home in Sagaponack, Long Island, NY.
1963 dosing on Sagaponack House January). Solo exhibition: Allan Frumta
iQa,Qer^ Chicago (October 7-November 2). Exhibits in “Annual Exhibition
!*63: Contemporary American Painting,” Whitney Museum of American An.
New York (December 11-February 2, 1964).

, Solo exhibition: Noah Goldowsky, New York (April 13-May 8). Visi
1965
r University of Oregon, Eugene, The Summer Academy of Conte
UC Arts Solo exhibition: Fountain Gallery of Art, Portland, Oregon (o,
rJv 2) Solo exhibition: Cord Galleries, Southampton, Long Island (July
29). Visiting Lecturer, Yale University (Fall).

1966 Solo exhibition: Allan Frumkin Gallery, New York (January 4-29
rence Campbell, “Paul Georges Paints a Nude,” is published in Art N
(January). The Studio appears on the cover. Model sues Art New. Lecti
School of Visual Arts. Lecturer, University of Pennsylvania (1966-67
Whitney Museum of American Art purchases The Studio (Neysa MeV
Purchase Award).

1967 Artist in residence, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, Louisi;
(September-November). Returns to New York (November). Exhibits in “
Annual Exhibition of Contemporary American Painting,” Whitney Mu
of American Art, New York (December 13-February 4, 1968).

1968 Solo exhibitions: Allan Frumkin Gallery, New York (January 6-Febr
4); Dorsky Gallery, New York (March 16-May 11); Union Art Gallery,
Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, Louisiana (opened April 7); Ai
residence, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, (February-April). E&gt;
in “Realism Now,” Vassar College Art Gallery, Poughkeepsie, New York
8-June 12).

1969 Alliance of Figurative Artists, initial discussion meeting; Georges ur
artists to overcome psychological barriers that make “cripples” of all fig
artists (February 14). Solo exhibition: Dorsky Gallery, New York (Marc!
May 11). Erwin Blumenfeld (b. 1897) dies, July 4. Visiting Professor, Bo:
University, Cooper Union, and Queens College (1969-70). Delivers lect
the Alliance of Figurative Artists: “The Necessity of Making an Image
(November 7). Exhibits in “1969 Annual Exhibition of Contemporary
American Art,” Whitney Museum of American Art, Nev/ York (Decemi
ebruary 1, 1970). John Canaday’s critique of “The Whitney Annual, or.
Back Your Muse” appears in The New York Times (December 21).

Moves to 85 Walker Street (January). Kent State Massacre (May 4).
ln Painterly Realism” circulated 1970-72 by The American Federation
1971 Artist ln residence, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge (Fall).

�Artist in residence, Dartmouth College, Hanover, New Hampshire (Spring)
’ 7,l0 exhibition: Dartmouth College, Hanover, New Hampshire. Solo exhibi]
Allan Frumkin Gallery, New York (March 31-April 25). Awarded Carol H
“ i Gold Medal at The Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine Arts “159th
: Annual Exhibition" (dosed March 1).

&gt;rk solo exhibition: Tibor de Naav
2). Designs stage scenery fOr
S
Fopatcong, New Jersey, by Herbert

exhibition at Reed College Facultv
at University of Oregon, Eugene
&gt;) Corot in Art Netos (November)

New York (April 23-May 11).
Franz Kline gives his color oil

Io exhibition: The Zabriskie
959).

md. Moves to 9 West 16th Street
tv York (February 23-March 13).
Is. Moves to 645 Broadway (Fall).
The Fifth International Hallmark
, New York (October 4-29);
71 (November 13).
ip Purchase Award. Solo Exhibi23-February 19). Visiting
ulder. (January-April). Trip to
and July 4). Solo exhibition: Reed
&gt;its in “Annual Exhibition of
luseum of American Art, New York.
Figure Painting in New York,
imers at Sag Harbor, Long Idan•
' York (November 6-December )•
NY.

Solo exhibition: Allan Frumkin
xhibits in “Annual Exhi ltl01!
hitney Museum of American Art,

,?65 Solo exhibition: Noah Goldowsky, New York (April 13-May 8). Visiting
' ecturer, University of Oregon, Eugene, The Summer Academy of Contempo: ran- Arts. Solo exhibition: Fountain Gallery of Art, Portland, Oregon (opened
\ juh-2). Solo exhibition: Cord Galleries, Southampton, Long Island Quly 23i 29) visiting Lecturer, Yale University (Fall).

1966 Solo exhibition: Allan Frumkin Gallery', New York January 4-29). Law­
rence Campbell, “Paul Georges Paints a Nude,” is published in Art News
(January)- 17&gt;e Studio appears on the cover. Model sues Art News. Lecturer,
School of Visual Arts. Lecturer, University of Pennsylvania (1966-67).
Whitney Museum of American Art purchases The Studio (Neysa McMein
purchase Award).
1967 Artist in residence, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, Louisiana
(September-November). Returns to New’ York (November). Exhibits in “1967
Annual Exhibition of Contemporary- American Painting,” Whitney Museum
of American Art, New York (December 13-February 4, 1968).

1968 Solo exhibitions: Allan Frumkin Gallery, New York January 6-February
4): Dorsky Gallery, New York (March 16-May 11); Union Art Gallery,
Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, Louisiana (opened April 7); Artist in
residence, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, (February-April). Exhibits
1 in “Realism Now,” Vassar College Art Gallery, Poughkeepsie, New York (May
8-June 12).
1969 Alliance of Figurative Artists, initial discussion meeting; Georges urges
artists to overcome psychological barriers that make “cripples’ of all figurative
I artists (Februarv 14). Solo exhibition: Dorsky Gallery, New York (March 16May 11). Erwin Blumenfeld (b. 1897) dies, July 4. Visiting Professor, Boston
University, Cooper Union, and Queens College (1969-70). Delivers lecture at
the Alliance of Figurative Artists: “The Necessity of Making an Image
(November?). Exhibits in “1969 Annual Exhibition of Contemporary
•American Art,” Whitney Museum of American Art, New York (December 16February- 1,1970). John Canaday’s critique of “The Whitney Annual, or, Take
Back Your Muse” appears in The New York Times (December 21).
1970 Moves to 85 Walker Street January). Kent State Massacre (May 4). Exhib'
in “Painterly Realism” circulated 1970-72 by The American Federation o

1971 Artist in residence, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge (Fall).

Stanford
dda *" ln coniunctlor&gt; with portrait commission of Dr. H. K.
F ’ , ° d’ P,re51de"' of the University of Miami. Member of Alliance of
Figurative Artists Panel, Topic: “Towards a Definition of Realism” (November 16).

1974 Delivers lecture at the Alliance of Figurative Artists: “Painting from
Imaginatton (March 29). Solo exhibition: Fischbach Gallery Downtown, New
ork (November 9-December 1). Member of Alliance of Figurative Artists
Panel, Topic: Subject Matter, Renaissance, Humanism,” (December 20).
Thomas Georges, Sr. (father) dies (December).

1975 Solo exhibition: Green Mountain Gallery, New York (March 7-27).
Delivers lecture at the Alliance of Figurative Artists: “Talk," (November 7).
Shows Mugging oj the Muse. Anthony Siani and Jacob Silberman subsequently
sue Georges for Libel.
1976 Solo exhibition: Fischbach Gallery Uptown, New York June 30-July 31).
Hilton Kramer savages exhibition in “Art View: A Disapointing Attempt at
Political Allegory,” The New York Times (July 11). The exhibition coincided with
Democratic National Convention held in New York City. Receives Creative
Artists Public Service Program (CAPS) Award from the New York State Council
on the Arts. Founder of the Artists’ Choice Museum.
1977 Visiting Professor of Art, Brandeis University, Waltham, Massachusetts.
Receives inheritance, purchases house at Pomfret, CT (Fall). Georges family
travels to Europe; itinerary includes London, Cambridge, Paris, Florence, Rome.
1978 Daughter Paulette marries Yannick Theodore (September 9). Brandeis
University Board of Trustees appoints Georges Professor of Fine Arts, with
tenure (October 6).
1979 Solo exhibition: Tomasulo Gallery, Fine Arts Department, Union College,
Cranford, New Jersey (February 2-27). Member Alliance of Figurative Artists
Panel Topic: “Eight Artists Speak of their Favorite Painting or Sculpture,
(February 16). Solo exhibition: Meghan Williams Gallery Los Angeles
(December-January 19, 1980). Visits Wyoming, Santa Barbara, and Los Angeles.

�awards Siani and Silberman $30,000.00 each (Fall). Solo exhibition. Swen
Parson Gallery, Northern Illinois University', DeKalb, Illinois, (Decern
January IS, 1981),

1981 Awarded Benjamin Altman (Figure) Prize at die National Academy of Design
"156th Annual Exhibition" (February' 26-March 29). Solo exhibition: Rose: Art
Museum, Brandeis University, Waltham, Massachusetts, (February 1-March 8).
Included in “Contemporary American Realism since 1960,” Pennsylvania Academy
of the Fine Airs, Philadephia (September 18-December 13).
1982 Elected Full Academician, National Academy of Design. Solo exhibition.
Zolla/Lieberman Gallery, Chicago (February 1-March 29); attends opening.
Appellate Court reverses libel award (December). Georges family visit Rome,
Naples, Pompeii, and Paestum (December).

1983 Visits California (May). Awarded Andrew Carnegie Prize at the National
Academy of Design u158th Annual Exhibition” (March 17—April 17). Yvette moves
to Los Angeles (May). Solo exhibition: College of the Mainland, Texas City, Texas,
(October-November 3); attends opening. Solo exhibition: The More Gallery,
Philadelphia (October 28-November 16). Sells Sagaponack house (December).
1984 Closing on Sagaponack house (January). Visits France for two weeks
(January). Departs for France (April), where he spends the summer in Valcanville on the River Saire. Grandaughter Rachel Theodore born to Paulette and
Yannick (May 25). Purchases “La Champagne”, a farmstead in Normandy (Fall,
closing in December). Begins final year as Professor of Art, Brandeis University
(Fall). Solo exhibition: Manhattan Art, New York (October 13-November 10).
Visits Santa Barbara and Los Angeles (November).

1985 Solo exhibition: William Crapo Gallery, The Swain School of Design, New
Bedford, Massachusetts, (February 18-March 14). Solo exhibition: Mead Art
.Museum, Amherst College, Amherst, Massachusetts (March 27-April 21).
During midterm, visits France, stays in Normandy residence. Retires from
Brandeis University (May). Solo Exhibition: The More Gallery, Philadelphia
(June). Summers in France. Included in “American Realism: Twentieth-Century
Drawings and Watercolors from rhe Glenn C. Janss Collection,” San Francisco
.Museum ofModern Art (November 7-January 12, 1986).

1986 Receives citation, American Academy and Institute of Arts and Letters
(March); exhibits in “Paintings and Sculptures by Candidates for Art Awards”
(March 3-29). Awarded Ranger Prize at the National Academy of Design
“161th Annual Exhibition.” Returns to New York (November). Solo exhibitionAnne Plumb Gallery', New York (December 2-January 10, 1987).

1987 Visits Santa Barbara (February). Returns to France (March). Returns to
New York (December).

1989 Delivers Lecture at the Alliance of Figurative Artists: Talk” (February 10)
Departs for France (February). Travels to Italy; visits Maser and Venice. Sees
work of Giotto and Piero della Francesca. Fire at Zolla/Lieberman Gallery,
Chicago destroys four paintings and approximately two dozen drawings
(April). Daughter Yvette marries Christopher Deeton (April). Solo exhibition:
Vered Gallery, East Hampton, Long Island (September). Returns to New York
(October). Solo exhibition: Greenville County Museum of Art, Greenville,
South Carolina (November 15-December).

1990 Awarded Certificate of Merit at the National Academy of Design “165th
Annual Exhibition” (February 7-March 7). Departs for France (March). Yvette
moves from Los Angeles to become manager of the Paul Georges Studio in
New York (March). Purchase Award, American Academy and Institute of
Arts and Letters, Childe Hassam and Spilcher Fund. Returns to New York
(December).
1991 Solo exhibition: The More Gallery, Philadelphia (February 1-March 6).
Solo exhibition: Anne Plumb Gallery, New York (February 9-March 16).
Departs for France (February). Awarded Gladys Emerson Cook Prize at the
National Academy of Design, New York. “ 166th Annual Exhibition” (April 2May 12). Visits Cornwall, England (May). Solo exhibition: Vered Gallery, East
Hampton, Long Island (August 31-September 30). Returns to New York
(November).
1992 Returns to France. Exhibits in “Slow Art: Painting in New York Now," P.S.
1 Museum, Long Island City (April 26-June 21). Receives Adolph and Esther
Gottlieb Foundation Individual Support Grant. Travels to London to see
Rembrandt and Mantegna Exhibitions; visits Venice and Vienna. Visits Brittany
in May and August to view Megaliths Alignments. Solo exhibition: SalanderO’Reilly Galleries, New York (August 1-31). Returns to New York (October 25).

1993 Returns to France (February). Awarded Emil and Dines Carlsen Award at
the National Academy of Design, New York. “168th Annual Exhibition” (April
1-May 2). Receives Pollock-Krasner Foundation, Inc. Grant (June). Views Titian
Exhibition in Paris. Visits Oxford (October). Returns to New York (November).
1994 Departs for France (March). Returns to New York (October). Solo
exhibition: Salander-O’Reilly Galleries, New York (November 1-26).

1995 Solo exhibition: Sordoni Art Gallery, Wilkes University, Wilkes-Barre,
Pennsylvania, (January 22-March 5). Returns to France (January'). Solo
exhibition: Galerie Darthea Speyer, Paris (February 2-March 18).

�1

�■SUB
£©!»,□M|4
. JI,MMMM
a
fit
III
i
Hateigg

igr -

iS»&gt;

I

IBliitl Mi11
ill I 1 II

»■■-■-■■■•

■

i

I

si

MjWfcMMM
.•&gt;&gt;'

1

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <collection collectionId="24">
      <elementSetContainer>
        <elementSet elementSetId="1">
          <name>Dublin Core</name>
          <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
          <elementContainer>
            <element elementId="50">
              <name>Title</name>
              <description>A name given to the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367364">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery Exhibition Programs, 1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="41">
              <name>Description</name>
              <description>An account of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367365">
                  <text>Exhibition programs created by the Sordoni Art Gallery from 1973 to the present. &#13;
&#13;
Digitized by Wilkes University Archives interns, Zachary Mendoza and Sophia Kruspha. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="39">
              <name>Creator</name>
              <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367366">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="48">
              <name>Source</name>
              <description>A related resource from which the described resource is derived</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367367">
                  <text>Wilkes University</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="45">
              <name>Publisher</name>
              <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367368">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="40">
              <name>Date</name>
              <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367369">
                  <text>1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="47">
              <name>Rights</name>
              <description>Information about rights held in and over the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367370">
                  <text>Wilkes University retains copyright of these exhibition programs. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="44">
              <name>Language</name>
              <description>A language of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367371">
                  <text>English</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="51">
              <name>Type</name>
              <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367372">
                  <text>Exhibition programs, flyers, and calendars. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="42">
              <name>Format</name>
              <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="400772">
                  <text>PDF</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
          </elementContainer>
        </elementSet>
      </elementSetContainer>
    </collection>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404682">
                <text>1995 January 22-March 5 Paul Georges: Self-Portraits</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="49">
            <name>Subject</name>
            <description>The topic of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404683">
                <text>Exhibition programs</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="39">
            <name>Creator</name>
            <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404684">
                <text>Paul Georges</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404685">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404686">
                <text>1995 January 22- March 5</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="42">
            <name>Format</name>
            <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404687">
                <text>PDF</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="51">
            <name>Type</name>
            <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404688">
                <text>Exhibition Book</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="51515" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="47087">
        <src>https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/files/original/92618e86bcc8c7415f114d336bd51db1.pdf</src>
        <authentication>e4ecb5924252154bb12074d040e3ce68</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="404673">
                    <text>:•

"i

FIVE MINUTES IN MEXICO

PHOTOGRAPHS BY MARK COHEN
SORD GA
TR647
C8F5
1989

��FIVE MINUTES IN MEXICO

�FIVE MINUTES IN MEXICO:
PHOTOGRAPHS BY MARK COHEN

Sordoni Art Gallery
Wilkes College
May 14 through June 11,1989

The Philip and Muriel Berman Museum of Art
Ursinus College
March 15 through April 16,1990

An exhibition organized by the
Sordoni Art Gallery, Wilkes College
and supported in part by a grant from the
Pennsylvania Council on the Arts

ESJEARilYLiBRARV
WILKES UNIVERSITY
WILKES-BARRE, PA

�■VsCHlVES

Introduction and Acknowledge!
,■

Copyright © 1989 by the Sordoni Art Gallery,
Wilkes College, Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania, 18766.
All rights reserved.

ISBN 0-942945-00-X

1

H

One thousand copies of this catalog were printed
on Mead Signature 100 pound papers.
7 he text is set in Schoolbook.
lype composition, duotone negative preparation, and
printing by Penn Creative Litho, Old Forge, Pennsylvania.
Design by Annie Bohlin,

It is a rare pleasure for a college gallery to organize am
exhibition of works by a member of its own academic commu
reputation and contribution to his field has international rar
This is the case with the current exhibition, Five Minutes
Photographs by Mark Cohen.
Cohen is well known for his black-and-white phot
Wilkes-Barre and Scranton, their environs and inhabita
tradition of the street photographer who captures the “decisv
first made prominent as an art form by’ Henri Cartier-Bres
uses a 35 mm camera and prefers the immediacy of the silvei
more subtle platinum print. His one man show in 1973 at th(
Modem Art led to others at the International Museum of P
(1974) and the Art Institute of Chicago (1975).
For short periods in 1981,1982, and 1985, Cohen mad
Mexico: the brevity and intensity of those trips is reflected i
this exhibition. Like the photographs of Pennsylvania, 1
pictures are fragments of everyday life, charged with Coh
sometimes confrontational energy. But a gentle side of the p
is also revealed in pictures of amazing textural richness,
compassion.
I thank Mark Cohen for collaborating in this
participation in every phase of the exhibition, from i
photographs to making suggestions for the catalog 1
contributed to its success. Annie Bohlin assisted in the sele&lt;
for the exhibition, designed the catalog, and determined tl
the photographs reproduced here. Her sensitivity' to Cohe
careful overseeing of the catalog production resulted in a p.
quality. Marvin Heiferman, who has followed Cohen s cs
70s, provided an insightful essay which gives us an inform
on Cohen’s Mexican photographs. The staff of the Zabris
New York helped in the early planning stages and made th
available to us for loan. The Pennsylvania Council on the
matching funding in support of the catalog and travellin

92--

�Introduction and Acknowledgements

Copyright - 1089 by the Sordoni Art Gallery,
Wilkes College. Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania. 18766.
All rights reserved.

ISBN 0-042945-00-X
Ont thousand copies of this catalog were printed
on Mead Signature 100 pound papers.
The text is set in Schoolbook.
Type composition, duotone negative preparation, and
printing by Penn Creative Litho, Old Forge, Pennsylvania.
Design by Annie Bohlin.

It is a rare pleasure for a college gallery to organize and mount an
exhibition of works by a member of its own academic community whose
reputation and contribution to his field has international ramifications.
This is the case with the current exhibition, Five Minutes in Mexico:
Photographs by Mark Cohen.
Cohen is well known for his black-and-white photographs of
Wilkes-Barre and Scranton, their environs and inhabitants. In the
tradition of the street photographer who captures the “decisive moment”
first made prominent as an art form by Henri Cartier-Bresson, Cohen
uses a 35 mm camera and prefers the immediacy of the silver print to the
more subtle platinum print. His one man show in 1973 at the Museum of
Modern Art led to others at the International Museum of Photography
(1974) and the Art Institute of Chicago (1975).
For short periods in 1981,1982, and 1985, Cohen made pictures in
Mexico: the brevity and intensity of those trips is reflected in the title of
this exhibition. Like the photographs of Pennsylvania, the Mexican
pictures are fragments of everyday life, charged with Cohen’s uneasy,
sometimes confrontational energy. But a gentle side of the photographer
is also revealed in pictures of amazing textural richness, humor, and
compassion.
I thank Mark Cohen for collaborating in this project. His
participation in every phase of the exhibition, from selecting the
photographs to making suggestions for the catalog format, have
contributed to its success. Annie Bohlin assisted in the selection of works
for the exhibition, designed the catalog, and determined the sequence of
the photographs reproduced here. Her sensitivity to Cohen’s work and
careful overseeing of the catalog production resulted in a product of high
quality. Marvin Heiferman, who has followed Cohen’s career since the
70s, provided an insightful essay which gives us an informed perspective
on Cohen’s Mexican photographs. The staff of the Zabriskie Gallery in
New York helped in the early planning stages and made the photographs
available to us for loan. The Pennsylvania Council on the Arts provided
matching funding in support of the catalog and travelling exhibition.

92-1838iN

-

�^produce this exhibition.

Judith H. O’Toole
Director

A DIFFERENT tri

��It’s hard to believe that only one hundred and fifty years have
passed since the announcement of the invention of photography; but
what is even more remarkable is that in that very short period of time
(the photographic era being only the tip of the iceberg of recorded
development), we’ve become so image-dependent. We read less, but
always want to see more. So, more and more magazines are published
yearly and in each magazine more and more ad pages are sold and more
and more images are reproduced. And we continue looking, like addicts,
as the tally of pictures mount. We watch movies in theaters and then
drive home through landscapes polka-dotted with satellite dishes, only
to shove more movies into the VCR.
Not only have we become mesmerized by photography in all of its
incarnations, we now actually need the camera’s particular brand of
vision, truth, and history. If we live so furiously in a hectic present that
we forget the past, photography helps us remember. If our lives seem
repetitive and small-time, photography reminds us of the larger world.
And if that bigger world starts to move too fast, photography stops it.
Photography even shows you how to be someone else, when you don’t
like who you are. When life seems totally out of control, when there are
riots downtown or plane crashes at the airport or outrageous instances of
child abuse in the house next door, photography calms us as it transmits
the bad news and the chaos, all within four neat, straight borders. And,
most of all, photography gives us a second crack at reality.
So, no wonder we enjoy pictures — taking them, being in them, look­
ing at them. Photographs encourage us to remember what has been seen
and to study what we never could have noticed: the expression on a face
turned away from us, but toward the camera; the full outline of the leg
that only attracted our attention from the corner of an eye; the shape of a
raindrop unintelligible in the commotion of a storm, but frozen on film.
We can now see that the history of the medium has gone full circle.
A century and a half ago, we invented photography. And now, the
influence of the photographic image is so pervasive that it is becoming
obvious that it is the pictures that are defining us.

□
Nowhere in the history of photography is this symbiosis between
image and identity clearer than in the startlingly ideosyncratic work of
Mark Cohen. We like to think of photographers as explorers, visionaries
in search of the exotic, documentarians in search of some universal

�I

and towns of eastern Pennsylvania, Cohen has assembled a unique
travelogue of his own Kafkaesque reality, a remarkable body of work
that is built upon split-second impulses and reactions. Because his work
is so instinctive, and so internalized, he has seldom needed to travel to
find subject matter. In his work, the unusual has always existed close at
hand. Often just around the comer.
Cohen’s photographs are challenging. There’s always just enough
of an edge of visual violence in his work — rudeness, nervous energy — to
continually confound our expectation of what photography might tell us
and what we should be looking for. Using a hand-held camera, pointing
it in directions we would never think of, Cohen has compulsively over­
turned Cartier-Bresson’s notion of “the decisive moment,” giving each
picture an exquisitely surreal American spin. In his photographs, the
decisive moment is never that slice of time in which human nature is
revealed, but is the instant that clarifies the distance between what is
noticed and what is understood.
In Cohen’s American photographs, people tend to look either
uncomfortable or, in one way or another, seductive; they are often angry
at the camera’s (and Cohen’s) intrusion. Common objects seem isolated,
mysterious, menacing. Cohen’s pictures, frequently illuminated by the
artificial light of a strobe, are expressions of distraction, masterpieces of
the unresolved feeling we all have, but would rather not acknowledge, let
alone display. He seldom fails to remind us how far our lives are from
how we would choose to have them remembered.
It’s ironic that an artist who takes pictures as if he were a tourist in
his own day-to-day reality should travel to a foreign country to make
calm photographs. But in the images included in this exhibit, made in
Mexico in 1981,1982, and 1985, that is exactly what we have the rare
opportunity to see. There is no terrifying sense of urgency in these
pictures. Mexico is just foreign enough to insert a little distance between
Cohen s mind and his nerve endings. His guard is down, he’s relaxed. So,
what we see is Cohen figuring out how to situate himself in an
environment, rather than define himself against it.
Look at the faces of the Mexicans depicted as they look back into
the camera. For them, Cohen isn’t butting in. He’s just another gringo

tourist, a harmless guy on holiday who will soon disappear with some
pictures they will never see. They’re amused by his presence. At most,
they’re mildly curious about what he might be looking at. While they are
used to this situation, he is not. And we are not. It’s a revelation to see
how Cohen works when he has the freedom of a visitor and has nothing
to lose.
As he shows us street life or people at work and at rest in cafes,
what we recognize is Cohen’s curiousity and sense of wonder at work.
The pictures don’t explode, they just seem to happen. They have an odd
sweetness. A stuffed alligator floats high on a restaurant wall, unex­
pected yet benign. Electrical wires dangle elegantly. And there are
pyramids everywhere, from the Pyramid of the Sun at Teotihuacan to
the yogurt display in a shop’s display case, from piles of fruit in a market
to beehives piled up at the edge of a highway, from a folded white napkin
that has fallen on the street to a Christmas tree being carried down the
street.
People dance, do their chores, live their lives. There are no major
confrontations, just leisurely and assured observations. There no
impending terror, none of the connoisseurship of little terrors that we’ve
come to expect in Cohen’s work.
In Mexico, Mark Cohen is a stranger, an outsider rather than a
participant. What a relief for him, and for us. The Mexican photographs
provide us with a peaceful opportunity to identify the strength, the grace,
and the formal assurance that form the underlying structure in all of
Cohen’s work, but are often overlooked.
Neither he, nor we, can presume to know too much about the
people or the lives that have been recorded. There are no existential
mini-dramas in any of the images. W e are not encouraged to measure our
lives against those of the subjects photographed. But what we are
presented with is a rare opportunity to watch how a difficult, brilliant
photographer navigates the unknown — with an ease, dignity, and
intelligence that we all might envy.

Marvin Heiferman

�^^homgrXg for two decades in Wilkes-Barre and in the cities

d towns of eastern Pennsylvania, Cohen has assembled a unique
Svelo-ue of his own Kafkaesque reality, a remarkable body of work
-hat is built upon snlit-second impulses and reactions. Because his work
is .o instinctive, and so internalized, he has seldom needed to travel to
find subject matter. In his work, the unusual has always existed close at
hand. Often just around the comer.
_
Cohen’s photographs are challenging. There s always just enough
of an edge ofvisual violence in his work — rudeness, nervous energy — to
continually confound our expectation of what photography might tell us
and what we should be looking for. Using a hand-held camera, pointing
it in directions we would never think of, Cohen has compulsively over­
turned Cartier-Bresson’s notion of “the decisive moment,” giving each
picture an exquisitely surreal American spin. In his photographs, the
decisive moment is never that slice of time in which human nature is
revealed, but is the instant that clarifies the distance between what is
noticed and what is understood.
In Cohen's American photographs, people tend to look either
uncomfortable or. in one way or another, seductive; they are often angry
at the camera’s &lt; and Cohen’s) intrusion. Common objects seem isolated,
mysterious, menacing. Cohen’s pictures, frequently illuminated by the
artificial light of a strobe, are expressions of distraction, masterpieces of
the unresolved feeling we all have, but would rather not acknowledge, let
alone display. He seldom fails to remind us how’ far our lives are from
how we would choose to have them remembered.
It’s ironic that an artist who takes pictures as if he were a tourist in
his own day-to-day reality should travel to a foreign country to make
calm photographs. But in the images included in this exhibit, made in
Mexico in 1981,1982, and 1985, that is exactly what we have the rare
opportunity to see. There is no terrifying sense of urgency in these
pictures. Mexico is just foreign enough to insert a little distance between
o en s mind and his nerve endings. His guard is down, he’s relaxed. So,
v at we see is Cohen figuring out how to situate himself in an
environment, rather than define himself against it.
ook at the faces of the Mexicans depicted as they look back into
e cameia. For them, Cohen isn’t butting in. He’s just another gringo

tourist, a harmless guy on holiday who will soon disappear with some
pictures they will never see. They’re amused by his presence. At most,
they’re mildly curious about what he might be looking at. While they are
used to this situation, he is not. And we are not. It’s a revelation to see
how Cohen works when he has the freedom of a visitor and has nothing
to lose.
As he shows us street life or people at work and at rest in cafes,
what we recognize is Cohen’s curiousity and sense of wonder at work.
The pictures don’t explode, they just seem to happen. They have an odd
sweetness. A stuffed alligator floats high on a restaurant wall, unex­
pected yet benign. Electrical wires dangle elegantly. And there are
pyramids everywhere, from the Pyramid of the Sun at Teotihuacan to
the yogurt display in a shop’s display case, from piles of fruit in a market
to beehives piled up at the edge of a highway, from a folded white napkin
that has fallen on the street to a Christmas tree being carried down the
street.
People dance, do their chores, live their lives. There are no major
confrontations, just leisurely and assured observations. There no
impending terror, none of the connoisseurship of little terrors that we’ve
come to expect in Cohen’s work.
In Mexico, Mark Cohen is a stranger, an outsider rather than a
participant. What a relief for him, and for us. The Mexican photographs
provide us with a peaceful opportunity to identify the strength, the grace,
and the formal assurance that form the underlying structure in all of
Cohen’s work, but are often overlooked.
Neither he, nor we, can presume to know too much about the
people or the lives that have been recorded. There are no existential
mini-dramas in any of the images. W e are not encouraged to measure our
lives against those of the subjects photographed. But what we are
presented with is a rare opportunity to watch how a difficult, brilliant
photographer navigates the unknown — with an ease, dignity, and
intelligence that we all might envy.
Marvin Heiferman

�1981
MEXICO CITY

���..

TO RTA5

. Xv.-.y

•

���-

�a
t

I
■

�����‘&gt;'fii

I.-: -:, : &lt;■'

:p

I
/7

'=-

I

Ji

���A

��r®

—4

-r I SifttaSH BtfillB
H I iW^lS§l!S^igiisgli:i^aSii§S -!;lI
fi
KIIliiiMliHiffl ■; ■ Wil! I
=Wi'=iSii»i'!=l^E:g^s=2fsS:=i=i
1 =| if t iijii:iSW120 ifB=.S:=s!g e g
I'• aB:;s:a.!Sg’'g.!:^S~i^r?.:gE:Sif:si:g =:s«£«~ g 1

Wf B:ii;iOs®S

i

gig^gsgSs&amp;seBsg.ggssSgfl?®"^ g

II SWIihBIifilfflrtHi

I fiMfliiiiBiiiifctt

| ^^E:=S:s8:ESi=®Js4i^S«i;::r^S .. —

5*
I
i- i

�1982
MEXICO CITY

�...

___

���saa

��J —. _

����I
1
BgjM- ?*; ,. J ?;.i: fjga!
"i ?-•.
■•■■

•

•

■

S

rosa blanca

I

iWffl
!

i

:\-|F

3y

t
*

14

. is
k

I

1
■

' ■

|lv L
"■Cb?; r

■

»K

»

!

��■I

: -LI

��I

; |

��I

..

L

��1985
VERACRUZ

��I
11 •

r

������1

�f
I

&lt;
■

t

w

v ■

i1

vj
I

la. i -

■w

■I

t

���£

��I

i

��do*.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.

&gt;).

6.
1.

3.
9.
10
11.
12.

13.

ilw()w()^n/operall98l
lining child in white cape], 1981
11 lark proud nian|. 1981
I Repiii ring I ’yramid of the Sun|, 1981. Weics
(Kids in old car at night] 1981
i
i inci
• - . HittIhtz C’rackers]1981
|(did
carrying. hi bag-vest approaches whiteline], 1981
(lloyin-^
iir/ in the whitedressskipping], 1981
girls in schoolclothes], 1981, Tepoztlan

14. t&lt;
15.

ids offruit], 1981
... iiyr.iiH1sheet], 1981
16-

[Bee hives/highway], 1982
[Fuses and meters], 1982
[Woman straps shoe in old building], 1982
[Local bar], 1982
[Table and chairs in street; flash], 1982
[La Rosa Blanca], 1982
[Wire lead into soda bottle], 1982
[Girl in small shoe repair], 1982
[Local restaurant and coffee], 1982
[Snack in steel case], 1982
[Napkin in shadow], 1982
[Girl in black skirt], 1982

Veracruz
December 12 -19,1985
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.

[Chalkboard menu], 1985
[Beauty shop], 1985
[Hanging light bulb], 1985
[Boy laughing; teeth], 1985
[Plastic sheet], 1985
[Waiter and money], 1985
[White sock], 1985
[Young girl eating], 1985
[Kids on sidewalk], 1985
[People dancing], 1985
[People walking/sidewalk], 1985
[Soda truck at gas pump], 1985
[Dog in shadows], 1985
[Napkins in glass], 1985

b.719b’

■ ,cw

v-.... "

her-'’"

,1^ n
J"'

g&gt;■y-

teleP"‘
I hill1"

Photographs are courtesy of the Zabriskie Gallery, New York.

�' .2

i

��</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <collection collectionId="24">
      <elementSetContainer>
        <elementSet elementSetId="1">
          <name>Dublin Core</name>
          <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
          <elementContainer>
            <element elementId="50">
              <name>Title</name>
              <description>A name given to the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367364">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery Exhibition Programs, 1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="41">
              <name>Description</name>
              <description>An account of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367365">
                  <text>Exhibition programs created by the Sordoni Art Gallery from 1973 to the present. &#13;
&#13;
Digitized by Wilkes University Archives interns, Zachary Mendoza and Sophia Kruspha. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="39">
              <name>Creator</name>
              <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367366">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="48">
              <name>Source</name>
              <description>A related resource from which the described resource is derived</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367367">
                  <text>Wilkes University</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="45">
              <name>Publisher</name>
              <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367368">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="40">
              <name>Date</name>
              <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367369">
                  <text>1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="47">
              <name>Rights</name>
              <description>Information about rights held in and over the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367370">
                  <text>Wilkes University retains copyright of these exhibition programs. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="44">
              <name>Language</name>
              <description>A language of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367371">
                  <text>English</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="51">
              <name>Type</name>
              <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367372">
                  <text>Exhibition programs, flyers, and calendars. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="42">
              <name>Format</name>
              <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="400772">
                  <text>PDF</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
          </elementContainer>
        </elementSet>
      </elementSetContainer>
    </collection>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404674">
                <text>1989 May 14-June 11 Five in Mexico</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="49">
            <name>Subject</name>
            <description>The topic of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404675">
                <text>Exhibition programs</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="39">
            <name>Creator</name>
            <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404676">
                <text>Mark Cohen</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404677">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404678">
                <text>1989 May 14-June 11</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="42">
            <name>Format</name>
            <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404679">
                <text>PDF</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="51">
            <name>Type</name>
            <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404680">
                <text>Exhibition Book</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="51514" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="47086">
        <src>https://omeka.wilkes.edu/omeka/files/original/cbc27b9799c2a44612618204f95b064f.pdf</src>
        <authentication>fdb38f0a7f47a0b6eddec7b8fc2795b3</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="404665">
                    <text>IBWs
r-^-.

~:r;

KiBflBORP*®-

EW

^WSO®#!

'

:JfI
7W

■•«■■■

M

lisss”

SORD GA
ND237
D98B5

�E.S. FARLEY LIBRARY
WILKES UNIVERSITY
WILKES-BARREJ’A

�BERENICE D’VORZON: P,

1980Tick Island and Louse Point ate i«-:rl place". Ihe.

bflonu to those ulmi-.r parii vai wildeme. .■ . &lt;d Long
Island which He a scant fifty miles horn the metropolis

&lt;»&lt;•••! in t- arid n,

I r&lt; k

of New York

have resided there I .: &lt; ■

.

pi r

ulhe

■ i't d.t Hie !&lt;-.'« tlncke'S.

■'&gt;

- t

in.rr tif.ind .'iri'

.ugh to

nvei'.h.i'low .iny olhe. 'inj..............1. .

, , .c--

tel-, i.&lt;• i •

have Ir.rd ol the tetI fill

i

II,line-, Io the .&lt;■ pl i&lt; e .

I ,ile| t.l . iv&gt; |er . b-o• •

• e■

of hind. *.e.&gt;

,

i .'.&gt;s

i

It ;.j .ip.

-.1 tie .11;,i

in Oldl’l to .dvor lh&lt;Old dif to b’ &gt;,

I
1‘

|(1 fj..

ih&lt; (*

nineteenth &lt; «-nthi y, i r&gt;-h:.t- i rd f it" . .- ipi 1 ■ . ,f r, t,
'.n&lt; h a . Joini I

I umini'.l ven .ibditie ,

1

,

. ,,i.

cover: no. 13

itJ |. t .]
. . . pl i-l.'.O » &gt; ,1

J‘-) ■ '.-e ;'e

They are not so

ulpturaliy dramatic i .rocky
&gt;

(. - 'U!&gt;&gt;r,t ■ &gt; ’r;«‘ y ;&gt; ;&lt;•■-.-,j
1 e 1; .
.

rnoio &lt; (Hit empl.it I
spirits leisurely before tt.e

Berenice bWorzor:
I ou-»e Point

.. r

:,'oa;i .e o'

nil',

1/ e 1. e o

r;

she beqrsn

e- e.e, .’.-,

East

di-.r,' r.-;- ,-.j.-e

,. •- -oioi

r. ,p.red b, la'..'!-., .-.pe

, t;f;

‘

Hampton m her ;&lt; r r,
t.-ie.r brew of i.qhr

, P if ;■

*&gt; -, I,;

lets of fiatuie horr. &gt;,&lt; .

SORDONI ART GALLERY
WILKES COLLEGE
150 South River Street
Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania 18766

.&lt;/; •

: . i'

' 0,1'.t-. of Main**.

h.'M hot -■&gt; of IA I . . r

ARCHIVES

:nei-

1. :i .

. ..

tO !'■&lt; r,irl tfil, .•■ (.h.||(. ;.■■'!

no. 15

Vour 1

A'.e

l"/ir.‘ 'I

1111nt the .per ial liqhi

f &gt;• e

Her wore f .a'. a.wa/s beer,
Lir.r,* Shaf’

na? • it..',

executed in the late neventie', *ere deoved from ’he

■ - around

:■

- pe-.,-.

�BERENICE D’VORZON: PAINTINGS &amp; DRAWINGS,
1980-1982

3. 13

II ART GALLERY
COLLEGE
i River Street
rre, Pennsylvania 18766

Tick Island and Louse Point are real places. They
belong to those almost primeval wildernesses of Long
Island which lie a scant fifty miles from the metropolis
of New York. Ticks and lice and myriad other species
have resided there for eons amidst the low thickets,
marshes, and surrounding sea. Pesty enough to
overshadow any other impressions early travelers may
have had of the terrain, the ticks and the lice gave their
names to these places.
Later travelers have endured the irritations of insects
in order to savor the more subtle and enduring moods
of land, sea, and air to be found there. In the
nineteenth century, a number of landscapists of note,
such as John F. Kensett and William S. Mount, came to
paint the special light and color which appealed to their
Luminist sensibilities. Painters still come to Long Island
to record those changing, yet changeless, phenomena.
They are not so sculpturally dramatic as the rocky
coasts of Maine, or so picturesquely quaint as the
harbors of Massachusetts. They appeal, perhaps, to
more contemplative souls who like to purloin the
secrets of Nature from her somnolence or imbibe her
spirits leisurely before the intoxication hits.
Berenice D’Vorzon has moved about Tick Island and
Louse Point since she began summering in East
Hampton in her teens, and she has drunk her share of
their brew of light and color. Her work has always been
inspired by landscape. The "Light Shaft” paintings she
executed in the late seventies were derived from the
orests around her farm in northeastern Pennsylvania.

Shafts of shifting colored light interplaying with shafts
of solid tree and foliage were transformed into radiant
graduations of tone and color in her canvases.
The paintings she has done over the past two years
have evolved during prolonged stays in East Hampton,
and stand in striking contrast to the “Light Shaft"
series. The coastal terrain may suggest to her a more
dynamic set of shapes than did the sylvan regiments of
Pennsylvania, or maybe there is simply some deeper
urge to replace the almost classical order of the
"Shafts” with a more baroque dynamism. The central
preoccupations with radiant light and ambiguous space
have not changed, but everything else has. Shapes twist
and turn, expand and contract with eruptive energy.
Paint flows, drips, and thrusts. Compositions seem held
together by more precarious means. We are on the
verge of experiencing something akin to the Action
Painting of the fifties.
D'Vorzon's formative years as an artist indeed
coincided with the tumult of Abstract Expressionism.
But in the sixties and early seventies, it became
fashionable to relegate that movement to the history
books, to declare it spent, as if a decade were enough
to explore its ramifications. There followed a
succession of styles which were emotionally detached,
compared to the naked passion of the Action group.
Pop Op, Minimal, and Photorealism all resolutely
avoided romantic personalism and bravura paint.ng
techniques. Abstract Expressionism was not a cool
style, and the sixties and seventies sought coolness.

91-18000B

�method
of the Expressionists. The recent varieties of painterly
primitivism, the New Imagists, and the messier, more
torrid forms of pattern painting are indicative of this
shift. D’Vorzon had never really drifted far from that
pole anyhow. While her “Light Shaft" paintings seem
rather cool in manner now, their romantic essence was
always apparent. The new works renew the painterly
dynamism of her early style, combining with it the
complex color and tonal harmonies worked out in the
intervening years. The result is a multivalent richness
of surface and illusion, substance and light, active and
passive movement — an orchestration of form which
intensifies the landscape experience to a level of
transcendence.
The most conspicuous Abstract Expressionist
element in the new works are the drips, which D’Vorzon
has revived without fear of being labelled a reactionary
action painter. William Pellicone, writing of D’Vorzon’s
1980 exhibition at the Soho Center for the Visual Arts,
noted the "classical structure (she added) to the usual
action drips."1 Functionally, the passive accident of
the drips plays against the willful propulsion of the
impasto arcs. The drips also reassert the flatness of the
picture plane against the atmospheric illusions of the
brushwork. The drips are, indeed, part of a repertory of
painterly gestures, along with the glazes, impastos,
scumbles, and ribbons of paint drawn from the tube, all
aimed at representing the dynamics of nature through a
distinctive and personal vision. Tempos overlap, and
muted expanses are invaded by shots of color which
ferry the eye across “seas” and along "shorelines.”

to explore other forms in the repertory, such as the
slashing arcs (e.g. “Louse Point Violet"). The “air and
sea” pictures of 1980 and early 1981, with their distant
horizons, began to give way in the middle of 1981 to
pictures containing definite foreground elements, as in
“Night Tracer (Tick Island)." Surging organic shapes
have come to dominate the latest pictures, notably the
“Acabonac Air” series.
D’Vorzon rightfully does not consider herself a flatout
Expressionist. There is unquestionably a powerful
emotional energy coursing through her work, but it
remains intimately attached to the landscape itself.
In fact, most of the paintings and drawings closely
resemble the essential patterns and tonalities
of specific places and phenomena. Their
representationalism is surprisingly clear when
compared with photographs of the sites.2 As Helen
Harrison observed in a recent reference to D’Vorzon's
work in The Tieu&gt; York Times, "the illusion of
landscape and the reality of the painted surface
alternate in the viewer’s consciousness.”’ Lush pigment
and strong design allow these paintings to stand alone
as abstractions, while clear echos of natural space and
light grant them illusionism.
Rather like the Cubists, D’Vorzon has fashioned a
surface which is simultaneously flat and threedimensional. This is a difficult ambiguity to maintain,
this retaining of the rich tactility and rhythmic
patterning of surface, while at the same time flirting
with a void aglow with colored light, or with a shape
that begins to penetrate into the canvas and assume
mass. In another review of D’Vorzon’s work last

"to describe a three-dimensional spatial sensation
without renaissance perspective illusions, by
taking painterly elements that could suggest the
sense of changing light, density, and mutations
of vibrant, sensuous experience, and using them
in new arbitrary ways to invent the essence of a
scene. Il is a vocabulary of nature's signs
reduced to the language of pigment. Color is
alternately solid and fluid as it gestures, drips,
moves, or is contained within bold shapes
composed of abstract strokes."4
The most recent paintings, such as the "Acabonac Air"
pictures, reveal clearer perspectives of the landscape.
D’Vorzon's interest in the dynamics of pictorial space
has. in fact, led her to the use of raking aerial views,
akin to late medieval landscapes, which reveal botfi the
perspective of the topography and its surface patterns.
Even more than space, light inspires D’Vorzon. An
immense, carefully orchestrated range of tonalities
pervades her work, paintings and drawings alike. Light
radiates from her surfaces in ways often more
suggestive of bravura quasi-lrnpressionists, such as
Manet or Sargent, than of the Abstract Expressionists.
In many of the works, her sensibilities seem to run even
closer to those of the great Romantic landscapist,
Turner, whose frothy evocations of mist laden air and
churning sea reached new heights of evocative
sublimity.

Like these i
provides us w
nature. Hers &lt;
out remote fn
condensation:
the sea. sunsr
seen, felt. ant
into some me
nature's press
Genesis in th
darkness upo
forms. The er
been coerced
pictorial dear

Notes
1.

William I
Look." ir

2. Compare
photogra
3.

Helen A.
and Real
January

4.

Phyllis B
Der.emb*

�we
ner
;rly
jre
is

at
m

was
y

he
!SS

and

:h

irzon
tary

an’s

.rts,
jal

the
le

y of
all
gh a
d

The drips have become less important since their
initial appearance, however, as D Vorzon has turned
to explore other forms in the repertory, such as the
slashing arcs (e.g. “Louse Point Violet ). The air and
sea” pictures of 1980 and early 1981, with their distant
horizons, began to give way in the middle of 1981 to
pictures containing definite foreground elements, as in
“Night Tracer (Tick Island).” Surging organic shapes
have come to dominate the latest pictures, notably the
“Acabonac Air” series.
D’Vorzon rightfully does not consider herself a flatout
Expressionist. There is unquestionably a powerful
emotional energy coursing through her work, but it
remains intimately attached to the landscape itself.
In fact, most of the paintings and drawings closely
resemble the essential patterns and tonalities
of specific places and phenomena. Their
representationalism is surprisingly clear when
compared with photographs of the sites.2 As Helen
Harrison observed in a recent reference to D’Vorzon’s
work in The New York Times, “the illusion of
landscape and the reality of the painted surface
alternate in the viewer’s consciousness.”3 Lush pigment
and strong design allow these paintings to stand alone
as abstractions, while clear echos of natural space and
light grant them illusionism.
Rather like the Cubists, D’Vorzon has fashioned a
surface which is simultaneously flat and threedimensional. This is a difficult ambiguity to maintain,
this retaining of the rich tactility and rhythmic
patterning of surface, while at the same time flirting
with a void aglow with colored light, or with a shape
that begins to penetrate into the canvas and assume
mass. In another review of D’Vorzon’s work last

December, Phyllis Braff described her search for a
method
"to describe a three-dimensional spatial sensation
without renaissance perspective illusions, by
taking painterly elements that could suggest the
sense of changing light, density, and mutations
of vibrant, sensuous experience, and using them
in new arbitrary ways to invent the essence of a
scene. It is a vocabulary of nature's signs
reduced to the language of pigment. Color is
alternately solid and fluid as it gestures, drips,
moves, or is contained within bold shapes
composed of abstract strokes."4

The most recent paintings, such as the “Acabonac Air"
pictures, reveal clearer perspectives of the landscape.
D'Vorzon’s interest in the dynamics of pictorial space
has, in fact, led her to the use of raking aerial views,
akin to late medieval landscapes, which reveal both the
perspective of the topography and its surface patterns.
Even more than space, light inspires D’Vorzon. An
immense, carefully orchestrated range of tonalities
pervades her work, paintings and drawings alike. Light
radiates from her surfaces in ways often more
suggestive of bravura quasi-Impressionists, such as
Manet or Sargent, than of the Abstract Expressionists.
In many of the works, her sensibilities seem to run even
closer to those of the great Romantic landscapist,
Turner, whose frothy evocations of mist-laden air and
churning sea reached new heights of evocative
sublimity.

Like these nineteenth century counterparts, D’Vorzon
provides us with an almost palpable immersion in
nature. Hers are not abstract permutations worked
out remote from their inspiration. They are vivid
condensations of specific phenomena — storms over
the sea, sunsets, glimmering ponds, tangled thickets —
seen, felt, and pushed through into paint, to bring us
into some moment of rapture which the artist felt in
nature’s presence. There is something like a vision of
Genesis in these paintings. Light emerges out of
darkness upon a primeval world of half-generated
forms. The energy is nascent and unbridled, but it has
been coerced by a controlling will into meaningful
pictorial drama.
William H. Sterling

Director

Notes
William Pellicone, ‘‘Tradition With the Forward
Look," in Artspeak, May 22, 1980.
2. Compare "Acabonac Air-Entrance" with the
photograph of Louse Point.
3. Helen A. Harrison, "49 Artists Capture the Illusions
and Realities of Winter," in The New York Times,
January 3, 1982.
4. Phyllis Braff, review in The East Hampton Star,
December 3, 1981.
1.

�lUl

no. 9

�no. 9

�PERSONAL HISTORY:
Born: New York City
BFA: Cranbrook Academy of Art (1954)
MA: Columbia University (1968)
Assoc. Prof. — Printmaking &amp; Painting, Wilkes College, Pa.
(since 1969)
EXHIBITIONS:
Sordoni Gallery, Wilkes College, Pa. (1982)
Loft Gallery, Southampton, N.Y. (1981) (3 person)
"Illusions of Space," First Women’s Bank, N.Y. (1981)
(4 person)
Soho Center for Visual Artists, N.Y.C. (1980) (2 person)
Benson Gallery, Bridgehampton, N.Y. (1976)
Everhart Museum, Pa. (1975) (2 person)
Keystone College, Pa. (1972)
Brata Gallery, N.Y.C. (1957, '59, ’62)

GALLERY GROUPS:
Marion Locks Gallery, Philadelphia, Pa. (1981, ’82)
Barbara Gillman Gallery, Miami, Fla. (1981, ’82)
Loft Gallery, Southampton, N.Y., ‘‘Collage’’ (1981)
Benson Gallery, N.Y. (1980)
lanuzzi Gallery, Scottsdale, Az. (1978-79)
N.E. Pennsylvania Invitational Traveling Exhibition
(1978, ’81)
Soho Co-op Galleries, N.Y.C. — 10th Street Artists (1978)
Lehigh University — Pennsylvania Printmakers Bicentennial
Invitational (1976)
Spoleto, Italy — Plinio i! Giovane (1973); Rome, Italy —
Primo Piano (1972)
Chicago — Robert Paul Gallery (1971); Detroit —
Rubiner Gallery (1971-72)
Paris, France — Creuze (1965); Mexico City — Proteo (1960)
New York — Brata, Camino, Tanager, Nonegon, Phoenix,
Artists, etc. (1958-68)

MUSEUM GROUPS:
Aldrich Museum, Conn., "New Acquisitions" (1981)
Guild Hall Museum, East Hampton, N.Y., "Winterscape"
(1981)
Allentown Museum (1976); Artists of the Springs,
Aswagh Hall (1976-80)
Roberson Museum, N.Y. (1975); Spoleto Festival (1973):
Vienna Print Biennale (1972)
Everhart Museum, Pa. (1968, '70, ’77): Guild Hall,
East Hampton (1967, '69, '70, '72, ’81)
Tokyo Museum of Modern Art (1960); Whitney Museum and
Library of Congress (1957)

AWARDS:
"Best Abstract Painting in Show," Guild Hall Museum Annual
(1981)
Purchase Award — Everhart Museum (1976)
Juror's Award — Roberson Museum (1975)
Award Exhibition — City Center, N.Y.C. (1955)

COMMISSIONS:
Curator: OIA sponsored travelling print show, “Artists Who
Make Prints” (1980-81)
Cover for N.E. Pennsylvania Philharmonic 1976-77 season
program
Mural (4 x 32 ft.), Community Medical Center Hospital, Pa.
(1977)
Mural (9 x 50 ft.), Percy Brown, Allentown, Pa. (1971)
COLLECTIONS:
Everhart Museum, Pa.; Aldrich Museum. Conn.; Library of
Congress; Oppenheimer Co.; Best Corp.; General
Instrument; Ivan Chermayeff (APC); Southampton Hospital:
Bank of New York, Miami; Wyoming National Bank, Dallas
and Kingston, Pa.; and many private Collections.

�3UPS:
m, Conn., “Hew Acquisitions" (1981)
eum, East Hampton, N.Y., “Winterscape”
eum (1976); Artists of the Springs,
(1976-80)
:um, N.Y. (1975); Spoleto Festival (1973);
Biennale (1972)
jm, Pa. (1968, ’70, ’77); Guild Hall,
&gt;n (1967, '69, ’70, ’72, ’81)
i of Modern Art (1960); Whitney Museum and
ingress (1957)

Painting in Show,” Guild Hall Museum Annual

d — Everhart Museum (1976)
— Roberson Museum (1975)
on — City Center, N.Y.C. (1955)

S:
lonsored travelling print show, “Artists Who
(1980-81)
Pennsylvania Philharmonic 1976-77 season

.), Community Medical Center Hospital, Pa.
.), Percy Brown, Allentown, Pa. (1971)

&gt;:
im, Pa.; Aldrich Museum, Conn.; Library of
ipenheimer Co.; Best Corp.; General
van Chermayeff (APC); Southampton Hospital;
York, Miami; Wyoming National Bank, Dallas
i, Pa.; and many private Collections.

no. 14

�no. 16

no. 17

Louse Point (photograph)

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

Cache-Cache
Low Horizon
Water 1980.
Fail Silver 15
Louse Point .
Louse Point
Hot Hight on
Water Tracer
Hight Tracer
E H Sassafra
E H Sassafra
Fresh Pond-\
AcabonacAi
Acabonac Ai
Tick Island S
Fresh PondA
E H Sassafra

�LIST OF WORKS
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

no. 16

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

17.

no. 17

Louse Point (photograph)

Cache-Cache 1980, acrylic on canvas, 60" x 68"
Low Horizon Melt 1980, acrylic on paper, 39" x 28"
Water 1980, acrylic on paper, 39" x 28"
Fall Silver 1980-81, acrylic on canvas, 68" x 60"
Louse Point Pink 1981, acrylic on canvas, 36" x 34"
Louse Point Violet 1981, acrylic on canvas, 50" x 40"
Hot Night on Tick Island 1981, acrylic on canvas, 40" x 30"
Water Tracer 1981, acrylic on canvas, 54" x 60"
Night Tracer (Tick Island) 1981, acrylic on canvas, 40" x 50"
E H Sassafras-Dancer 1981, acrylic on canvas, 54" x 60"
E H Sassafras-Interlock 1981, acrylic on paper, 21" x 28"
Fresh Pond-Wind 1981, acrylic on canvas, 60" x 68"
Acabonac Air-Entrance 1982, acrylic on canvas, 68" x 84"
Acabonac Air-Landing 1982, acrylic on canvas, 68" x 72"
Tick Island Storm 1981, graphite on paper, 27" x 41"
Fresh Pond-Wind 1981, graphite on paper, 27" x 41"
E H Sassafras-Dark 1981, graphite on paper, 27" x 41"

�BERENICE D’VORZON
Paintings
and
Drawings

1980-1982
SORDONI ART GALLERY
Wilkes College

�■*-

'

•

■

SBr-b: 4«
rt'/A

ioooxa?

]

�^^8

ESSSsSSsjHsss^s-S^sy -

MSSa^^^M
Lr^-;^

SsoW'S^i-i-s-

E^SS.f^S-Ci.S:
p^s^ViT,’

taBS

-■t?

’ 1'

-s

f.rJ

I

cJ5S
■ ■■-

■?■

■

■.

is
' S/S;

~sS
SSS£5||gjg?g=

=§^5?SS~g

ifeSSg?
jjsSsglsss

f?

gj

^S=SS5S

SlSi;ss.s

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <collection collectionId="24">
      <elementSetContainer>
        <elementSet elementSetId="1">
          <name>Dublin Core</name>
          <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
          <elementContainer>
            <element elementId="50">
              <name>Title</name>
              <description>A name given to the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367364">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery Exhibition Programs, 1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="41">
              <name>Description</name>
              <description>An account of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367365">
                  <text>Exhibition programs created by the Sordoni Art Gallery from 1973 to the present. &#13;
&#13;
Digitized by Wilkes University Archives interns, Zachary Mendoza and Sophia Kruspha. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="39">
              <name>Creator</name>
              <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367366">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="48">
              <name>Source</name>
              <description>A related resource from which the described resource is derived</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367367">
                  <text>Wilkes University</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="45">
              <name>Publisher</name>
              <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367368">
                  <text>The Sordoni Art Gallery</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="40">
              <name>Date</name>
              <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367369">
                  <text>1973-present </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="47">
              <name>Rights</name>
              <description>Information about rights held in and over the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367370">
                  <text>Wilkes University retains copyright of these exhibition programs. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="44">
              <name>Language</name>
              <description>A language of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367371">
                  <text>English</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="51">
              <name>Type</name>
              <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="367372">
                  <text>Exhibition programs, flyers, and calendars. </text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
            <element elementId="42">
              <name>Format</name>
              <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
              <elementTextContainer>
                <elementText elementTextId="400772">
                  <text>PDF</text>
                </elementText>
              </elementTextContainer>
            </element>
          </elementContainer>
        </elementSet>
      </elementSetContainer>
    </collection>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404666">
                <text>1980-1982 Berenice D'Vorzon: Paintings and Drawings</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="49">
            <name>Subject</name>
            <description>The topic of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404667">
                <text>Exhibition Programs</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="39">
            <name>Creator</name>
            <description>An entity primarily responsible for making the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404668">
                <text>Berenice D'Vorzon</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404669">
                <text>Sordoni Art Gallery; Wilkes University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404670">
                <text>1980-1982</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="42">
            <name>Format</name>
            <description>The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404671">
                <text>PDF</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="51">
            <name>Type</name>
            <description>The nature or genre of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="404672">
                <text>Exhibition Book</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
  </item>
</itemContainer>
